Skip to main content

Full text of "General Drafting"

See other formats


to ,-- FM 5-553 



FIELD MANUAL 



GENERAL DRAFTING 



HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY 

JANUARY 1 984 



< 



U 
H 
fi 

O 
H 
CO 

o 

>—) 

H 
U 
< 

a 

fa 

W 
J 
CO 

< 

o 

l-H 

w 

> 

o 



£ 



E-h a, 



£* 



fc^ Q, 



■C cj 



fi o. 



V V) 

■C CJ 

o a. 






CD r-( C- 

CD 00 CI 

C- C- t- 



o 

00 



00 


TT 


Oi 


m 


t-H 


CO 


CN 


•*t 


m 


t> 


en 


o 


oo 


oo 


oo 


00 


oo 


OS 



CN 


oo 


CO 


Oi 


^ 


o 


CN 


CO 


m 


co 


00 


o 


Ol 


CD 


05 


Oi 


Ci 


o 



CO 


Tf 


to 


oo 


o> 


00 


00 


oo 


oo 


00 



cn 


Tf 


in 


t- 


00 


o 


Ol 


05 


o> 


OJ 


Oi 


p 



SIS SIS SIS 3|g SIS SIS SIS H« SIS SIS SIS SIS SIS S|8 SIS - 



t> 


CN 


00 


-<1< 


Ol 


^ 


CD 


r- 


OS 


o 


in 


in 


m 


m 


CD 



in 


iH 


CO 


CN 


■^ 


m 


CO 


CO 


<o 



oo 


CO 


oo 


o 


CD 


c- 



CTi Tf O 

M co tn 



CN 


CO 


m 


CD 


00 


<y> 


m 


in 


m 


m 


m 


m 



CN 

CO 



CD 



CD 
CD 



CD 



O 



CN 



m 



co|-<tf 

CO CD 



d-|cn ml-^ -s |cd 



I"* Oi 

|cD ^H 



CN OJ 
CO CO 



. ",_||^ r-l|CN CO|"t rHlCD l« I ^T CO I CN t"- I "tf CO I T* 

m|oo 5|3 £J|eo rf|S rnlr-i -tflco cn|co ttIcd "1^ 



to 


rH 


t- 


CD 


00 


O 


CN 


CN 


CN 



00 


TC 


Ol 


CN 


*tf 


m 


CO 


CO 


CO 



T-i 


CD 


CN 


00 


CO 


OS 


■^ 


o 


Oi 


o 


CN 


CO 


in 


CD 


00 


o 


CO 


tT 


Tf 


Tf 


"* 


Tj< 


Tf 


m 









CO 


^ 


CD 


00 


OS 


i-H 


CN 


"* 


m 


t- 


00 


o 


CN 


CO 


CO 


CO 


CO 


CO 


CO 


CO 


"^ 


**. 


Tf 


tT 


TtJ 


^ 


in 



IS<* 



l N &[*? ml' ,H I^! 
CO i-l|cD '"IrH CNlcD 



|CN CO|t}< 
CO CN cx> 



,-!„ mlTt COICN t-l'* p, 

<n\<x> c*\<d i-i|co cn|cd ^ 



Icd ct>|^ mlcN ih |tj< 

|rH CN|CD 1H|C0 CO | CD 



CD iH 

l-H CO 

O O 



CN 

O 



<IS 



CO 

o 



o 



m 
o 



CN oo ■* 
co t- OJ 
o o o 



Oi 

o 



m 

CN 



CO 

m 



CN 



00 
00 



CD 

© 



00 

o 



OJ 

© 



CO 

o 

CN 



© 
CN 



CT> "^ © 

ih co m 

tN CN CN 



CN 
CN 



CO 
CN 



in 

CN 



<|S«IS 



|S«*IS«|8 r-|s 



l°o^|s ^I^^IS^ISSIS^IS 



^SIS-I 



ESSENTIALS 

OF 
DRAFTING 



JAMES D. BETHUNE 



Wentworth Institute 
Boston, Massachusetts 



PRENTICE-HALL, INC. 

Eng/ewood Cliffs, New Jersey 07632 






Library of Congress Cataloging in Publication Data 

BETHUNE, JAMES D. (date) 
Essentials of drafting. 

Bibliography 

Includes index. 

1. Mechanical drawing. I. Title. 
T353.B455 604\2 76-17056 

ISBN 0-13-284430-3 



© 1977 by Prentice-Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, N.J. 07632 



All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced in any form 
or by any means without permission in writing from the publisher. 



10 9 8 7 



Printed in the United States of America 



PRENTICE-HALL INTERNATIONAL, INC., London 
PRENTICE-HALL OF AUSTRALIA PTY. LIMITED, Sydney 
PRENTICE-HALL OF CANADA, LTD., Toronto 
PRENTICE-HALL OF INDIA PRIVATE LIMITED, New Delhi 
PRENTICE-HALL OF JAPAN, INC., Tokyo 
PRENTICE-HALL OF SOUTHEAST ASIA PTE. LTD., Singapore 
WHITEHALL BOOKS LIMITED, Wellington, New Zealand 



To KENDRA 



CONTENTS 



Deface xu 

Chapter J DRAFTING-TOOLS 
AND THEIR USE 



Introduction 2 

2 Pencils, Leadholders, and Erasers 

3 Scales 4 

4 T-squares and Triangles 6 

5 Compass 10 



1-6 Protractors 11 
1-7 Curves 12 
1-8 Templates 13 
1-9 Other Tools 14 
Problems 16 



Chapter 2 LINES AND LETTERS 

2-1 Introduction 26 
2-2 Kinds of Lines 26 
2-3 Freehand Lettering 27 
2-4 Guide Lines 28 
2-5 Lettering Guides 29 
Problems 30 



Chapter 3 GEOMETRIC CONSTRUCTIONS 



3-1 Introduction 36 

3-2 Points and Lines 38 

3-3 Add and Subtract Lines 39 

3-4 Parallel Lines— First Method 40 

3-5 Parallel Lines-Two Triangle Method 41 

3-6 Bisect a Line— First Method 42 

3-7 Bisect a Line— Second Method 43 

3-8 Divide a Line Into Any Number of Equal 

3-9 Divide a Line Into Any Number of Equal Parts 

3-10 Fillets-Right Angles Only 46 

3-11 Fillets-Any Angle 47 



44 



viii 



Contents 



3-12 Rounds— Any Angle 48 

3-13 Hexagon— First Method 49 

3-14 Hexagon— Second Method 50 

3-15 Hexagon-Third Method 51 

3-16 Hexagon-Fourth Method 52 

3-17 Hexagon-Fifth Method 53 

3-18 Pentagon— How to Draw 54 

3-19 Pentagon— Definition 55 

3-20 Octagon 56 

3-21 Fillet-Two Circles 57 

3-22 Round— Two Circles 58 

3-23 Fillet— Concave Circle to a Line 59 

3-24 Round— Convex Circle to a Line 60 

3-25 S-Curve (Reverse or Ogee Curve) 61 

3-26 Approximate Ellipse 62 

3-27 Bisect an Angle 63 

3-28 Parabola 64 

Problems 65 



Chapter 4 PROJ ECTION THEORY 

4-1 Introduction 71 

4-2 Orthographic Projections 

4-3 Principal Plane Line 74 

4-4 Points 75 

4-5 Lines 77 

4-6 Planes 80 

4-7 Curves 82 
Problems 84 



71 



Chapter 5 



THREE VIEWS 
OF AN OBJECT 



5-1 Introduction 88 

5-2 Normal Surfaces 88 

5-3 Hidden Lines 90 

5-4 Inclined Surfaces 94 

5-5 Curved Surfaces 95 

5-6 Sketching 97 

5-7 Visualization Techniques 
Problems 102 



101 



Chapter 6 DIMENSIONS 

AND TOLERANCES 



6-1 Introduction 112 

6-2 Extension Lines, Dimension Lines, 

Leader Lines, and Arrowheads 113 
6-3 Locating and Presenting Dimensions 114 
6-4 Unidirectional and Aligned Systems 123 
6-5 Dimensioning Holes 123 
6-6 Dimensioning Angles and Holes 124 
6-7 Dimensioning Small Distances 

and Small Angles 125 
6-8 Base Line System 125 
6-9 Hole-to-Hole System 126 
6-10 Coordinate System 126 



Contents j x 



6-11 Tabular Dimensions 126 

6-12 Irregularly Shaped Curves 128 

6-13 Common Dimensioning Errors 128 

6-14 Tolerances 128 

6-15 Cumulative Tolerances 129 

Problems 131 



Chapter 7 OBLIQUE SURFACES 
AND EDGES 



7-1 Introduction 139 

7-2 Compound Edges and Lines 139 

7-3 Oblique Surfaces 144 

1-A Parallel Edges 147 

7-5 Dihedral Angles 149 

7-6 Holes in Oblique Surfaces 153 

7-7 Internal Surfaces in Oblique Surfaces 162 

Problems 165 



Chapter 8 CYLINDERS 



8-1 Introduction 1 71 

8-2 Cuts Above the Center Line 1 72 

8-3 Cuts Below the Center Line 1 74 

8-4 Inclined Cuts 176 

8-5 Curved Cuts 1 78 

8-6 Chamfers 181 

8-7 Holes 184 

8-8 Eccentric Cylinders 184 

8-9 Hollow Sections 186 

Problems 189 



Chapter 9 CASTINGS 



9-1 Introduction 195 

9-2 Fillets and Rounds 195 

9-3 Round Edge Representation 196 

9-4 Runouts 197 

9-5 Spotfaces and Bosses 198 

9-6 Machining Marks 198 

Problems 199 



Chapter JO SECTIONAL VIEWS 



10-1 Introduction 205 

10-2 Cutting Plane Lines 206 

10-3 Section Lines 208 

10-4 Multiple Sectional Views 210 

10-5 Revolved Sectional Views 211 

10-6 Half Sectional Views 211 

10-7 Broken Out Sectional Views 212 

10-8 Projection Theory 213 

10-9 Holes in Sectional Views 214 

10-10 Auxiliary Sectional Views 214 

10-11 Dimensioning Sectional Views 214 

Problems 215 



x Contents 

Chapter 11 AUXILIARY VIEWS 

11-1 Introduction 224 

11-2 Reference Line Method 225 

11-3 Projection Theory Method 228 

11-4 Auxiliary Sectional Views 231 

11-5 Partial Auxiliary Views 231 

11-6 Secondary Auxiliary Views 232 
Problems 241 



Chapter 12 FASTENERS 



12-1 Introduction 247 

12-2 Thread Terminology 247 

12-3 Thread Notations 248 

12-4 Thread Representation 248 

12-5 Threads in a Sectional View 253 

12-6 Threads 254 

12-7 Types of Bolts and Screws 255 

12-8 Threaded Holes 255 

12-9 Drawing Bolt and Screw Heads 258 

12-10 Rivets 260 

12-11 Welds 261 

Problems 262 



Chapter 13 METRICS 



13-1 Introduction 267 

13-2 The Metric System 267 

13-3 Conversion Between Measuring Systems 268 

13-4 Conversion Tables 269 

13-5 First Angle Projections 272 

Problems 274 



Chapter 14 PRODUCTION DRAWINGS 

14-1 Introduction 280 

14-2 Assembly Drawings 280 

14-3 Detail Drawings 282 

14-4 Title Blocks 282 

14-5 Parts List 283 

14-6 Revision Blocks 283 

14-7 Drawing Zones 284 

14-8 Drawing Notes 284 

14-9 One-, Two-, and Partial View Drawings 284 

14-10 A Drawing Detail 287 

14-11 Drawing Scales 287 

14-12 Drilling, Reaming, Counterboring, and 

Countersinking 288 
Problems 290 



Contents xi 

Chapter 15 ISOMETRIC DRAWINGS 

15-1 Introduction 297 

15-2 Normal Surfaces 299 

15-3 Slanted and Oblique Surfaces 302 

15-4 Holes in Isometric Drawings 306 

15-5 Round and Irregular Surfaces 311 

15-6 Isometric Dimensions 315 

15-7 Isometric Sectional Views 315 

15-8 Axonometric Drawings 316 

15-9 Exploded Drawings 317 
Problems 318 



Chapter 16 OBLIQUE DRAWINGS 

16-1 Introduction 325 

16-2 Normal Surfaces 327 

16-3 Inclined and Oblique Surfaces 332 

164 Holes in Oblique Drawings 335 

16-5 Rounded and Irregular Surfaces 336 

16-6 Dimensioning an Oblique Drawing 340 

16-7 Oblique Sectional Views 341 
Problems 341 



Chapter 17 DEVELOPMENT DRAWINGS 

17-1 Introduction % 348 

17-2 Rectangular Prisms 348 

17-3 Inclined Prisms 352 

174 Oblique Prisms 354 

17-5 Cylinders 357 

17-6 Pyramids 362 

17-7 Cones 367 
Problems 370 



Appendix A FINDING THE TRUE LENGTH OF A LINE 
BY USING 
THE REVOLUTION METHOD 374 

Appendix B GAME PROBLEMS 376 
Appendix C DRAFTING ART 377 



Appendix D STANDARD 

THREAD SIZES 378 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 381 
INDEX 382 



PREFACE 



This book has been written for the student who is taking drafting 
either to satisfy a curriculum requirement or as an elective, but who is 
not a drafting major. This student usually wishes to gain a basic working 
knowledge of drafting fundamentals so that he can apply it to other 
courses, but he is often hindered in obtaining this knowledge by a 
combination of limited class time (basic drafting is normally a one 
semester course) and large class enrollments. This situation forces the 
student to rely heavily on the instructor's lectures and on his own 
ability to read and understand the text. 

To make it easier for the student to learn from this text, the 
material is presented using a step-by-step problem-solving format ac- 
companied by many illustrations. The written portion of the text may 
be described as a "how to" approach. The idea is to present not only 
drafting theory, but also the procedures and conventions used to apply 
the theory. This will enable the student to work directly from the text 
to the board while doing his class and homework drawings. 

The scope of the material presented has been limited to those sub- 
jects most often needed to prepare technical drawings, with heavy 
emphasis on orthographic views (including sectional views and auxiliary 
views) and dimensioning. Fasteners, oblique, isometric and develop- 
ment drawings are also covered. Although limited in scope, the material 
is presented in depth. Four chapters, for example, discuss how to draw 
three views of an object. 

Special care was taken in choosing exercise problems for each 
chapter. The problems are directly related to the subject of the chapter, 
and are, for the most part, presented in isometric form to help the stu- 
dent learn visualization. Many are presented on grid background in 
order to force the student to create all his own dimensions without any 
hints or leads from dimensions used to state the problem. The problems 
which are dimensioned are done so using decimals and the unidirec- 
tional system, although most of the decimals are convenient fractional 
equivalences. 

The text also includes metrics. Chapter 13 is entirely devoted to 
linear metric measurements (as used on technical drawings) and first 
angle projection. All other chapters contain at least one exercise prob- 
lem done in metrics. 

Several people deserve my special thanks for their contributions 
to this book. My wife, Kendra, not only did all the typing but also did 
the initial editing for grammar and spelling errors. Chris Diincombe 



Preface xiH 

contributed his photographic skills to create interesting and imagina- 
tive photographs. George Cushman, my colleague at Wentworth Institute, 
was always willing to argue and discuss a method or teaching approach. 
And Cary Baker and Stu Horton of Prentice-Hall always answered all 
my questions promptly and clearly. Thanks to you all. 

Finally, I would like to make a request of you, the reader. Please 
send me your comments. A formal letter isn't necessary— just a marked 
up xerox copy of the sections in question would be fine. Being a teacher 
myself, I'm well aware that every text has certain sentences or illustra- 
tions which, although not wrong, consistently cause confusion. I would 
sincerely appreciate your pointing these out to me. 



JAMES D. BETHUNE 



Wentworth Institute 
550 Huntington Avenue 
Boston, Massachusetts 



DRAFTING TOOLS 
AND THEIR USE 







i 



Figure 1-0 Illustration courtesy of Teledyne Post, Des Plaines, 
Illinois 60016. 



1-1 INTRODUCTION 

This chapter explains and demonstrates how to use basic drafting 
tools. Most sections in the chapter are followed by exercises especially 
designed to help you develop skill with the particular tool being pre- 
sented. Try each tool immediately after reading about it by doing the 
appropriate exercises. As you work, try to learn the capabilities and 
usage requirements of each tool, because it is important that you know 
how to use each tool with technical accuracy, skill, and creativity. 



1-2 PENCILS, LEADHOLDERS, 
AND ERASERS 

Figure 1-1 shows several different pencils and leadholders. Most 
draftsmen prefer to draw with leadholders instead of pencils because 
leadholders maintain a constant weight and balance during use which 
makes it easier to draw uniform lines. 



4-r^ 



1 ' 






: ^BL ^ 




'7*™T" "' "^fc_ 


..: 


. 












■ 
Figure 1-1 Pencils and lead holders. 



Sec. 1-2 



Pencils, Leadholders, and Erasers 



Regardless of whether a leadholder or pencil is used, its lead must 
be kept sharp with a tapered, conical point like the one shown in 
Figure 1-2. Figure 1-3 shows several different lead sharpeners and 
Figure 1-4 shows how to sharpen a lead by using a sandpaper block. 

When sharpening a lead, care should be taken to keep the graphite 
droppings away from the drawing. Most draftsmen keep a cloth or 
piece of clay handy to wipe the excess graphite from a newly sharpened 
lead. 

Leads come in various degrees of hardness, graded H to 9H. The 
higher the number, the harder the lead. Light layout and projection 
lines are usually drawn with the harder leads; darker lines, used for de- 
tailing and lettering, are drawn with the softer leads. 




Lead Holder's 
Jaws 



Lead 



figure 1-2 The shape of a properly sharp- 
ened lead. 



1 *?v 









Figure 1-3 Lead sharpeners. 



Figure 1-5 shows several different kinds of erasers and an erasing 
shield. The harder erasers are used for removing ink lines and the softer 
ones are used for removing pencil lines. Gum erasers (very soft) are used 
when large amounts of light erasing are required. 

An erasing shield enables a draftsman to erase specific areas of a 
drawing and thereby prevents excessive redrawing of lines that might 
otherwise have been erased. To use an erasing shield, place it on the 
drawing so that the area to be removed is exposed through one of the cut- 
outs. (The various cutouts are shaped to match common drawing 
configurations.) Hold the shield down firmly and rub an eraser into the 
aligned cutout until the desired area is removed. When the erasing is 
finished, the excess eraser particles should be brushed off. Figure 1-6 
demonstrates the above method. 




Figure 1 -4 Sharpening a lead using a sand- 
paper block. 





! >■■' ri- - ' 

Figure 1-5 Erasers and an erasing shield. 



Figure 1-6 Using an erasing shield. 



1-3 SCALES 

Scales are used for linear measuring. Figure 1-7 shows a grouping 
of several different kinds of scales. The scale most commonly used by 
draftsmen is one with its inches graduated into 16 divisions with each 
division measuring one-sixteenth of an inch. Figure 1-8 shows part of a 
"16-to-the-inch" scale along with some sample measurements. Unlike 
a real scale, the scale in Figure 1-8 has the first inch completely labeled 
to help you become familiar with the different fractional values. Mea- 
surements more accurate than one-sixteenth must be estimated. For 
example, 1/32 is halfway between the and the 1/16 marks. 

Figure 1-9 shows part of a decimal scale. Each inch is divided into 
50 equal parts making it possible to make measurements within 0.01 




! t 




■ : 



■ y * -, . • ;.:•- " ; ■ ■ •-• • ■• 



, 







Figure 1-7 Scales. 



Sec. 1-3 



Scales 



16 



-* t= 



J_ 
16 



7_ 
16 



16 I 16 

3- 
1 



1 32 



16 



!1 
16 



3 



16 



J5 
15 



* 2 



Figure 1-8 A 16-to-the-inch scale with some sample measure- 
ments. 



S 



.26 



-* .14 -H 



-.50 



.37 



-.73 



1.04- 



R 



50 



CM -tftOcO 

qoo.o 



.6 



TT 



.8 



too 



Figure 1-9 A decimal scale with some sample measurements. 



inch (hundredth of an inch) accuracy. Several sample readings have 
been included and the first 0.10, unlike a real decimal scale, has each 
graduation mark labeled. 

Many scales are set up for other than '< full-sized drawing. For 
example, the V* scale enables a half -sized drawing to be made directly 
without having to divide each dimensional value by 2. Three-quarter 
scales enable direct %-sized drawings to be made, and so on. 



Drafting Tools and Their Uses 



Chap. 1 



HALF 



15 
16 



3 -k 



11 
16 



1* 



Figure 1-10 A half scale with some sample measurements. 

All fractional scales are read as shown in Figure 1-10. Only one of 
the sections representing an inch is graduated into fractional parts. This 
graduated section is located to the left of the "0" mark. When making a 
reading (for example, 3-7/8) on a fractional scale, read the whole (3) 
part of the number to the right of the "0" and the fractional part (7/8) 
to the left. See Figure 1-10 for an example of a 3-7/8 reading on a half 
scale. 



1-4 T-SQUARE AND TRIANGLES 

A T-square is used as a guide for drawing horizontal lines and as a 
support for triangles which, in .turn, are used as guides for drawing 
vertical and inclined lines. Figure 1-11 shows a T-square and several 
different sizes and types of triangles, including an antique wooden one. 



Figure 1-11 T-square and triangles. 




? 




-: -, ". 



Figure 1-1 2(a) Drawing a horizontal line using a 
T-square as a guide. 



Figure 1-1 2(b) Drawing a horizontal line using a 
T-square as a guide. 



To use a T-square or triangle as a guide for drawing lines, hold the 
pencil as shown in Figures l-12(a) and l-12(b) and pull the pencil along 
the edge of the straight edge from left to right. (These instructions are 
for right-handed people. Left-handed people should reverse these direc- 
tions.) Rotate the pencil as you draw so that a flat spot will not form 
on the lead. Flat spots cause wide, fuzzy lines of uneven width. Always 
remember to keep your drawing lead sharp. 

When using a T-square, hold the head (top of the T) firmly and 
flat against the edge of the drawing board. Use your left hand to hold 
the T-square still and in place while you draw. When you move the T- 
square, always check to see that the head is snug against the edge of the 
drawing board before you start to draw again. 

When a T-square and a triangle are used together to create a guide 
for drawing, the left hand must not only hold the T-square in place; it 
must also hold the edge of the triangle firmly and flat against the edge 
of the T-square. To accomplish this, use the heel of your hand to hold 
the T-square in place and your fingers to keep the triangle against the 
T-square (see Figure 1-13). 

It is important that all your tools be accurate. A T-square, for 
example, must have a perfectly straight edge. If it does not, you' will 
draw wavy lines and inaccurate angles with the triangles. To check a 
T-square for accuracy, draw a long line by using the T-square as a guide. 
Then flip the T-square over, as shown in Figure 1-14, and, using the 
same edge you just used as a guide, see if the T-square edge (now upside- 
down) matches the line. If it does not, the T-square is not accurate. 
Triangles should be checked for straightness in the same manner 
used to check a T-square, but, in addition, they must be checked for 
"squareness." To check a triangle for squareness, align the triangle 
against the T-square and draw a line by using the edge of the triangle 
which forms a 90°-angle to the T-square as a guide. Holding the T- 
square in place, flip the triangle over, as shown in Figure 1-15, and see 
if the triangle edge matches the line. If it does not, the triangle is not 




y*" 




. 



Ml 




Figure 1-13 Drawing a vertical line using a 
T-square and a triangle as a guide. 



Figure 1-14 Measuring the following angles 




Figure 1-15 Checking a triangle for squareness. 



Sec. 1-4 



T-Square and Triangles 



square, meaning either that the 90°-angle is not 90°, or that the edge of 
the triangle is curved, or that the edge of the T-square is curved. 

To use the T-square and triangle as a guide for drawing a line 
parallel to a given inclined line, align the long leg of the triangle with 
the given line and then align the T-square to one of the other legs of 
the triangle, as shown in Figure 1-16. By holding the T-square in place 
with your left hand, you can slide the triangle along the T-square and 
the long leg will always be parallel to the originally given line. You may 
substitute another triangle in place of the T-square, as shown in Figure 
L-17, and obtain the same results. Note that in either setup, the short 
leg of the moving triangle is 90° to the long leg, meaning that you have 
a guide not only for parallel lines, but also for lines perpendicular to 
those parallel lines. 

A T-square may be used in combination with a 30-60-90 triangle 
and a 45-45-90 triangle to produce a guide for drawing lines which are 
15° and 75° to the horizontal. Figure 1-18 illustrates how this is done. 




Figure 1-16 Using a T-square and a triangle 
as a guide for drawing inclined parallel lines. 



Figure 1-17 Using two triangles as a guide 
for drawing inclined parallel lines. 



Figure 1-18 Using a T-square, a 45-45-90 triangle, and a 30-60- 
90 triangle to draw lines 15° and 75° to horizontal. 








i 

| 
_ ... | 

j i i 

I 

|h — 

■ 



" 




Figure 1-19 Compasses. 



Figure 1-20 Setting a compass. 



1-5 COMPASS 

A compass is used to draw circles and arcs. The three basic kinds 
of compasses are drop, bow, and beam. The bow is the most common 

(SSe T^a^ompass, set the compass opening equal to the radius of 
thP dPsired circle or arc by using a scale as shown in Figure 1-2U. men 
otf he coTpL point directly on the circle center point and, using 
lly one hanTand shown in Figures l-21(a) and l-21(b), draw m the 
circle. 




Figure l-2l(a) Drawing with a compass. Illustration courtesy of 
Teledyne Post, Des Plaines, Illinois 6001o. 



Figure l-21(b) Drawing with a compass. 



■ : 
■ . . . 







10 



Sec. 1-5 



Compass 



11 



A compass lead must be sharpened differently from a pencil lead 
since the compass lead cannot be rotated during use to prevent flat 
spots from forming. Figure 1-22 shows how to sharpen a compass lead 
and Figure 1-23 shows a close-up of a properly sharpened compass 
lead. 



1-6 PROTRACTORS 

A protractor is used to measure angles. Figure 1-24 shows three 
different kinds of protractors. The edge of a protractor is calibrated in- 
to degrees and half degrees. Figure 1-25 shows part of a typical protrac- 
tor edge along with some sample measurements. Measurements more 
accurate than half a degree (0.5°) must be estimated. 

To measure an angle, place the center point of the protractor on 
the origin of the angle so that one leg of the angle aligns with the 0° 
mark on the protractor. Read the angle value where the other leg of 
the angle intersects the calibrated edge of the protractor. 




i , •:=';. mi 



Figure 1-22 Sharpening a compass lead. 



Lead 




Compass 



■ 



Figure 1-23 The shape of a properly 
sharpened compass lead. 



Figure 1-24 Protractors. 



Figure 1-25 A protractor with some sample measurements. 




12 



Drafting Tools and Their Uses 



Chap. 1 



1-7 CURVES 

Curves are used to help draw noncircular curved shapes. Drafts- 
men refer to them as French curves or ship's curves, depending on their 
shapes (ship's curves look like the keel of a ship). Figure 1-26 shows a 
grouping of curves. 

Noncircular shapes are usually defined by a series of points and a 
curve is used to help join the points with a smooth, continuous line. 
Using a curve to help create a smooth line is difficult and requires much 
practice Most students make the error of trying to connect too many 
points with one positioning of the curve. Figure 1-27 shows a series of 
points that are partially connected. The curve is in position to serve lis 
a guide for joining only points 3 and 4-not 3, 4, and 5-even though all 
three seem to be aligned. To join point 5 using the .shown curve posi- 
tion would make it almost impossible to draw a continuous smooth 
curve. 



i 



; 1 i 



■ 




j r ^0®m 



\ ' 






Figure 1-26 Curves. 



L* 







Figure 1-27 Aligning a curve with given points. 









«f. i SI 






«. 






■ 



Figure 1-28 Templates. 






; 



■ 
■ 



'M ■» M. 












■ 



^ 



■ 



- 



• 



. 



Figure 1-29 Circle templates. 















1-8 TEMPLATES 

Templates are patterns cut into shapes useful to a draftsman. They 
save drawing time by enabling the draftsman to accurately trace a de- 
sired shape. Some templates provide shapes that are difficult to draw 
with conventional drawing tools (very small circles, for example). 
Other templates provide shapes that would be tedious and time-con- 
suming to layout and draw (ellipses, for example). Figure 1-23 shows a 
sampling of templates. 

The most common template used in mechanical drafting is the 
circle template (see Figure 1-29). The holes of a circle template are 



n 



14 



Drafting Tools and Their Uses 



Chap. 1 




r^r^tS I I,t Mk>* 




Figure 1-30 Using a circle template. 



labeled by diameter size and are generally made slightly oversized to 
allow for lead thickness. Always check a circle template before initial 
use to see if lead allowance has been included. 

To use a circle template, locate the center point of the future 
circle with two lines 90° to each other. Align the template with the two 
90° lines by using the four index marks printed on the edge of the 
template hole. Draw in the circle- Keep the leadholder vertical and 
constantly against the inside edge of the hole pattern. Check the 
finished circle with a scale. Figure 1-30 shows how to use a circle 
template. 



1-9 OTHER TOOLS 

There are many tools, other than the ones already presented, 
which are used to help create technical drawings. Figure 1-31, for 
example, shows an adjustable curve ( t+ snake") which is very helpful 
when drawing unusually shaped curves. Figure 1-31 also shows several 

other tools. 

Figures 1-3 2 (a) and 1-3 2(b) illustrate a drafting machine. A draft- 
ing machine is a combination T-square, triangle, protractor, and scale 
which, when used properly, will greatly increase drawing efficiency. 
The information previously presented for using a T-square t triangle, 
protractor, and scale may be directly applied to using a drafting ma- 
chine. Check the manufacturer's instructions for the specific functions 
of the machines. 



Sec. 1-9 



Other Tools 



15 




: . • 



Figure 1-31 Magnifying glass, dividers, adjustable curve (snake), 
tape, and brush. 





Figure l-32(a) Using a drafting machine and an adjustable draw- 
ing board. Illustration courtesy of Teledyne Post, Des Plaines 
Illinois 60016. 



Figure 1 -32(b) Using a drafting machine. 
Illustration courtesy of Teledyne Post, Des 
Plaines, Illinois 60016. 



16 



Drafting Tools and Their Uses 



Chap. 1 



PROBLEMS 



1-1 (a) Measure the following lines to the nearest 1/16 of an inch: 
(b) Measure the following lines to the nearest .01 of an inch: 



m 



1-2 Draw four 8"-lines as shown in Figure Pl-2. Make the lines very 
light and very thin. Define the left end of each line as point 1. 



ii 



~\ 1.00 
2,50 1 
4.00 I 



5.50 



1.00 



3E 



^\ ^V H 4^ 






5- 



<5 



-.25 Border 
all around 



Figure Pl-2 



Problems 17 

Using point 1 as a starting point, measure off and label the fol- 
lowing points: 

Line 1 



Line 2 



Line 3 



Distance 


Value 


1-2 


1-3/8 


1-3 


1-9/16 


1-4 


2-1/4 


1-5 


2-7/8 


1-6 


3-21/32 


1-7 


5 


1-8 


5-3/8 


1-9 


5-3/4 


1-10 


6-5/16 


1-11 


7-15/16 


Distance 


Value 


1-2 


0.8 


1-3 


1.4 


1-4 


2.6 


1-5 


3.1 


1-6 


4.3 


1-7 


5.0 


1-8 


5,5 


1-9 


6.2 


1-10 


6.9 


1-11 


7.7 


Distance 


Value 


1-2 


0.38 


1-3 


1.25 


1-4 


2.44 


1-5 


3.06 


1-6 


4.22 


1-7 


5.00 


1-8 


5.50 


1-9 


6.13 


1-10 


6.94 


1-11 


7.88 



Line 4 The values given must be reduced by a factor of 2 

to fit on the line. Therefore, using a % scale, draw 
the values. 



Distance 


Value 


1-2 


1.75 


1-3 


2.25 


1-4 


4.38 


1-5 


6.75 


1-6 


8.63 


1-7 


10.00 


1-8 


11.50 


1-9 


12.88 


1-10 


13.75 


1-11 


16.00 



18 



Drafting Tools and Their Uses 



Chap. 1 



1-3 Measure the following lettered distances to the nearest 1/16 of an 
inch. 




1-4 Measure the following lettered distances to the nearest .01 inch. 




Problems 

1-5 Redraw the following figure. 



19 



1-6 Redraw the following figure. 





1-7 Redraw the following figure. 



1-8 Redraw the following figure. 



4.00 





20 



Drafting Tools and Their Uses 



Chap. 1 



1-9 Redraw the following figure. 



1-10 Redraw the following figure. All dimensions are in 
millimeters. 




80 



63 



ii 



17 



30 



50 



1-11 Redraw the following figure. Use only 
a T-square, a 30-60-90 triangle, and a 
45-45-90 triangle or a drafting machine. 

^15°- 6 PL ACES 




1-12 Redraw the following figure. The smallest circle is 
1" in diameter and each additional circle is 1 
larger in diameter up to 6" . 




1-13 Redraw the following figure. 




Problems 

1-14 Redraw the following figure. 



21 




Figure PI -14 (a) 




Figure PM4(b) Measure the following angles. 



22 



1-15 Redraw the following figure. 



-^- TYPICAL 




Drafting Tools and Their Uses 

1-16 Redraw the following figure. 
1 DJA 



Chap. 1 



r £ TYPICAL 



>^ 


5x 






( ^ 


r 1 


t 






i 


i ' 4 

i 


-4- 


3 *- 


— 1 



4 DIA 



1-18 Redraw the following figure. Use a circle 
template to draw in the rounded corners. 



1-17 Redraw the following figure. 



2 R 
2 PLACES 





8 PLACES 



1-19 Draw two curves x versus y^ and x versus y 2 using the data points 
provided. Use an axis system like the one presented and carefully 
label each curve. 



X 


*i 


y 2 


.00 


.00 


2.00 


.50 


1.00 


1.74 


1.00 


1.74 


5.00 


1.50 


2.00 


.00 


2.00 


1.74 


-1.00 


2.50 


1.00 


-1.74 


3.00 


.00 


-2.00 


3.50 


- l.UU 


-1,74 


4.00 


-1.74 


-1.00 


4.50 


-2.O0 


.00 


5.00 


-1.74 


1.00 


5.50 


-1.00 


1.74 


6.00 


.00 


2.00 



Problems 
1-20 Redraw the following curve. 



23 




L-21 Redraw the following curve. 



4 

4 




■24 



Drafting Tools and Their Uses 



Chap. 1 



1-22 The following panel is part of a monocoque chassis design for a 
dirt track motorcycle. It was created by Bob Gould and Peter 
Morgan. Draw the panel on B-size (11 X 17) paper and use the V\ 
scale on your triscale. Label the finished drawing "Scale l A = 1." 




2 PLACES 



MATL 
.125 7075-T6 AL 



1-23 The performance data for the Yamaha 350RD pictured below is 
given in the table provided. Plot the data, draw in the curves, 
label each curve, and then write a short paragraph explaining 
what the curves mean. 

Engine Performance for Yamaha RD 350: 



Engine Speed (rpm) 


Horsepower (bhp) 


Torque (ft-lb) 


2000 


6.0 


15.0 


3000 


10.5 


17.0 


4000 


15.0 


19.5 


5000 


21.0 


21.5 


6000 


29.0 


25.0 


7000 


37.0 


28.0 


8000 


36.5 


23.0 


9000 


24.0 


12.0 




Figure Pl-23 Photograph courtesv of YAMAHA Corp. 




DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY 

OFFICE OF THE ADJUTANT GENERAL 
WASHINGTON. D.C. 20310 



REPLY TO 
ATTENTION OP 



DAAG-PAP-A 



SUBJECT: General Drafting, FM 5-553 



TO: HOLDERS OF FM 5-553 



6 January 1984 



1. This commercial publication has been assigned Army publication number 
FM 5-553 and supersedes TM 5-581A. 

2. This publication provides a central source of information for the 
technical drafting specialist, MOS 81B. 

3. This letter will be permanently affixed to the book for the purpose of 
authenticating its use as an official DA training publication. 

BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF THE ARMY: 



Official: 

ROBERT M. JOYCE 

Major General, United States Army 

The Adjutant General 



JOHN A. W1CKHAM, JR. 
General, United States Army 
Chief of Staff 



DISTRIBUTION: 



Active Army, ARNG, USAR : To be distributed in accordance with Controlled 
Distribution list. 



LINES AND LETTERS 



2 




Figure 2-0 Illustration courtesy of Teledyne Post, Des Plaines, 
Illinois 60016. 



2-1 INTRODUCTION 

This chapter deals with drawing some of the many different kinds 
of lines used in technical drawings and deals with creating freehand let- 
tering. Since each of these techniques will require a great deal of prac- 
tice before proficiency is developed, don't be discouraged if your first 
attempts seem shaky. The more you draw, the better your techniques 
will become. 



2-2 KINDS OF LINES 

There are many kinds of lines commonly used on technical draw- 
ings: visible, hidden, center, leader, and phantom to name but a few. 
Each has its own specific configuration, thickness, intensity, and usage, 
some of which are defined below. They are illustrated in Figure 2-1. 
Those lines not defined in this chapter have a very specialized usage 
which will be explained in conjunction with the subjects to which they 
are related. 

VISIBLE LINES: Heavy, thick, black lines approximately 0.020 inches 
thick. Uniform in color and density. It may be helpful to draw object 
lines with a slightly rounded lead in order to generate the necessary 
thickness. To form a slightly rounded lead point, first sharpen the lead 
and then draw a few freehand lines on a piece of scrap paper to take the 
initial sharpness off the lead. 
—Used to define the visible edges of an object 
HIDDEN LINES: Medium, black, dashed lines approximately 0.015 
inches thick. The dashes should be approximately four times as long as 
the intermittent spaces. Hidden lines should be a little thinner and a 
little lighter than visible lines. 

—used to define the edges of an object which are not directly visible. 
For further explanation, see Section 5-3. 

LEADER LINES: Thin, black lines about 0.010 inches thick. Leader 
lines should be noticeably thinner (about half as thick as visible lines). 
To achieve the required line contrast, draw leader lines with a sharply 
pointed lead. 

—used to help dimension an object. For further explanation, see Sec- 
tion 6-2. 

CENTER LINES: Thin, black, lines drawn in a long line-space-short 
line-space pattern approximately 0.010 inches thick. The long sections 
may be drawn at any convenient length, but the short sections must be 
approximately 1/8 long and the intermittent spaces should be approxi- 
mately 1/16 long. Except for this configuration, center lines are identi- 
cal to leader lines. 

—used to define the center of all or part of an object. They are most 
commonly used to define the center of holes. They may also be used to 
help dimension an object. 



26 



Sec. 2-3 



Freehand Lettering 



27 



Visible Line 




Hidden Line 


Leader Line 


Center Line 




Phantom Line 






Figure 2-1 Five different types of lines commonly used on tech- 
nical drawings. 



PHANTOM LINES: Thin, black lines drawn in a long line-space-short 
line-space-short line configuration approximately 0.010 inches thick. 
The long sections may be varied in length, but the short lines must be- 
1/8 longand the intermittent spaces should be approximately 1/16 long, 
—used to show something that is relative to but not really part of a 
drawing. 

After you have studied Figure 2-1, try the exercises included at 
the end of the chapter. Concentrate on line intensity and thickness and 
on the contrast between the different kinds of lines. Intensity and 
thickness are important, but equally important is that there be a notice- 
able difference between the lines. For example, visible lines must be 
approximately twice as thick as leader lines. 



2-3 FREEHAND LETTERING 

Figures 2-2 and 2-3 show the shape and style of the letters and 
numbers most commonly used on technical drawings. Either the verti- 
cal or inclined style is acceptable. The most widely accepted height for 
letters and numbers is 1/8 or 3/16, although this may vary according to 
the individual drawing requirements. 



ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 



10TS56-4 



0I23456789 

Figure 2-2 Vertical letters and numbers. 



28 Lines and Letters Chap. 2 

ABCDEFGHIJKL M N P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 
ab cd efg h ij klm n o p q rs tu vwxyz 




0123456789 

Figure 2-3 Inclined letters and numbers 



When you are lettering, see that the lead is tapered and slightly 
rounded at the tip. This differs from the tapered, sharp shape recom- 
mended for drawing lines because it is easier to draw letters and num- 
bers with a rounded point. 

Also when you letter, use a softer lead (H or 2H) because it is 
easier to letter with a soft lead than with a harder one. Since soft leads 
tend to deposit excess amounts of graphite on the drawing, save let- 
tering until the last phase of creating a drawing. 



2-4 GUIDELINES 

Guide lines are very light layout lines 1/8 or 3/16 apart (or what- 
ever letter height is desired) which serve to help keep freehand lettering 
at a uniform height. They may be drawn with the aid of a scale and T- 
square or with the aid of a special guide line tool such as the Ames 
Lettering Guide. Draftsmen sometimes draw their guide lines usmg a 
nonreproducible blue pencil so that when the drawing is reproduced 
the guide lines seem to have disappeared and only the letters or num- 
bers remain. Figure 2-4 illustrates guide lines. 

Draftsmen sometimes avoid putting guide lines on their drawings 
by slipping a piece of graph paper, whose grid lines are the desired 
distance apart, under the paper and then lettering within the grid lines. 
This, of course, may be done only if you are working on a transparent 
media. 



i"i 



lor A 
8 16 



1 

1 



f 



Figure 2-4 Guide lines for lettering. 



Sec. 2-5 



Lettering Guides 



29 




IIJIJ— mWW.UlLlMUM 



Figure 2-5 Creating guide lines for lettering by sliding a previ- 
ously prepared set of parallel lines under the drawing paper. 

If graph paper is not available or does not have the right size grid, 
you may make your own guide line pattern on a, separate piece of paper 
and then slide it under your drawing as was reconimended for the graph 
paper. Figure 2-5 shows how this is done. Save the prepared guide line 
pattern for future use. 



2-5 LETTERING GUIDES 

There are several different lettering guides that may be used to 
create letters and numbers for drawings. By far the most widely used 
guide for pencil work are the stencil kind shown in Figure 2-6. 

When you use a lettering guide, support it with a rigidly held T- 
square or other straight edge so that all the lettering is kept in the same 
line. Use the same lead point shape described for use in freehand let- 
tering (see Section 2-3). 



Figure 2-6 Lettering guides. 




^mmua&mmmmmBimmmssammtao^ 






10 Lines and Letters 

PROBLEMS 
2-1 Redraw the following figure. 



Chap. 2 



I 1 

■ ! : i 
i 



Lb— — - 1 



-*J U — -J- Typical, 
! all aw 






m 



2-2 Redraw the following figure. 



^ Typical 




Problems 



31 



2-3 Redraw the following figure. 




-y Typical 



2-4 Redraw the following figure. 




-1- Typical 



~2 Lines and Letters 

2-5 Redraw the following figure. 



Chap. 2 



ALL Lin0s are -1- apart 




2-6 Letter the following notes.* Use the format illustrated in Figure 
P2-6. 

1. Right shown -left-sym. opp. 

2. All inside bend radii are 2-times metal thickness unless other- 
wise shown. 

3. Mating surfaces must be coordinated with master die model of 

parts as shown. 

4. Same as 3431906 except as shown & use 3799034 w/wpr 
motor decal in place of 3431908. 

5 For inspection purposes, anchor hole at point A to set dimen- 
sions specified, and check points B & C with 50# load applied 
at point D in direction shown. Do not use tension spring 
during insp. check. 

6. Open tab for access to seat track attachment. Tab must be 
closed after assy, of track (2-places). 

7. Exceptions to PS4480-entire week may be coded with first 
workday of that week. 

8 The terminals shall not loosen or pull off their component 
" assy at less than 15-lb effort applied to either terminal for 
installation or removal of mating terminal. 
9. For additional detail, see master model in Ornamentation 
Studio Dept 6910. 

*Courtesy of Chrysler Corporation. 



Problems 



33 



10. Vendor must obtain location approval for gating & ejector 
pms & dimensional approval of ejector pin bosses from mate- 
rials laboratory engineering staff prior to construction 




*r 



— Border - all around 



Figure P2-6 

2-7 Using the format shown in Figure P2-6, letter in the following 
notes:* 6 



1. Test per spec. P-72-B. 

2. Paint black per spec. M-33. 

3. Fan hood opening and fittings that fall on centerline of radi- 
ator may vary ±0.06 from centerline. 

4. "Ref" dimensions are for information only and therefore will 
not be inspected per this print. 

5. Permissible quality of hose fittings is 2% of outer diameter. 

6. Finish: black paint per AM 6015 to withstand 96-hr salt 
spray test per AM 6015 except finish on stainless steel flex- 
ible blade to withstand 20-hr salt spray test. 

7. All stamped identifications must be legible after painting. 

8. Remove all fins & burrs. 

9. Alternate balancing method: balance by drilling 0.33" dia. 
max. holes in spider arms. The complete hole must be within 
2 of the spider o.d. & the max. depth to drill point must be 
0.125 . 

'Courtesy of American Motors. 



34 Lines and Letters Cha P- 2 

10 Part no. & vendor identification (C.F.-RD-69597) to be 
stamped in this area with 0.25" size letters X .010/.005 deep 
on one or more arms & must appear on backside of fan blade 
reinforcement cap. n 

11. Valve must be fully open (.50 min stroke) at 8.0 ± .02 HG 
vacuum signal on diaphragm. 

12. Engineering approval of samples from each supplier is re- 
quired prior to authorization of part production. 

2-8 Using the format shown in Figure P2-6, letter in the following 
information:* 

Drafting Checking Guide 

The following check list should be used as a guide in checking 
drawings for compliance with related sections of Manufacturing 
Standard S, Drafting Standards. 

1. Does the general appearance of the drawing conform to Ford 
Manufacturing Drafting Standards? Is the drawing clear, neat, 
and thorough? 

2. Have the proper sheet sizes been used? 

3. Has the title block been filled in completely and is the infor- 
mation correct? Are the title, scale, date, drawing and sheet 
numbers, etc., correct? Is the title complete and clear? Does 
the title include name of tools or equipment, operation or 
product part name? 

4. Is the ^rawing number correct and according to the proper 
"Z" classification? 

5. Are figures, letters, and lines correctly formed, uniform, and 
clean? Are they sharp and dense enough to assure good repro- 
duction and legibility? 

6. Are the necessary views and sections shown and are they posi- 
tioned in proper relation to each other? 

7. Do witness lines extend to the correct surface? 

8. Do arrowheads extend to the correct witness lines? 

9. Are all necessary dimensions shown? 

10. Are drawings and dimensions to scale? 

11. Are dimensions which are not to scale underlined with a wavy 
line, except those details with broken out sections? 

12. Has duplication of dimensions and notes been avoided? 

13. Are all components and included jobs shown in the stock list? 

14. Has the assembly drawing been changed to agree with revised 
detail drawing? 

15. Are related "Z" and "S" numbered tools properly listed on 
the main assembly drawings for reference? 

16. On rework jobs are all changes fully and clearly listed? 

17. Are cast details designed according to established practices? 
See Group XB5. 

2-9 Using the format shown in Figure P2-9, letter in the following 
information. Place the first line of information directly over the 
column headings and label each additional line above the previous 
line. 

- *Courtesy of Ford Motor Company. 



As 
Required 










1 
























j 


' .38 


QTY 


PART NO. 


DESCRIPTION 




1 


-*-1.13-»- 


-" 1.75—*- 




QTY. 


PART NO. 


— 7.00 »*-| 

DESCRIPTION 


1 


564S72 


Housing 


1 


564S75 


Cover Plate 


4 


663A46 


Clips 


2 


100T01 


Bracket 


12 


XX 


6-32 Screws 


1 


564S80 


Side Support R.H, 


1 


564S85 


Side Support L.H. 


1 


564S90 


Base Plate 


4 


678Q99 


Dowel Pins 








Figure P2-9 





2-10 Using the format shown in Figure P2-10, letter in the following 
information.* Use your own initials under -the DR heading. Leave 
the CK column blank. 





< — 

.75 


h*-.8S* 


6.13 




* 


, 1 


J. 23 *■ 




i 


' .33 

i r 


SYM 


DATE 


REVISION RECORD 


DR 


CK 






































A 


8 










Required 













SYM. 



DATE 



REVISION RECORD 



1 


7/16/69 


Optional Weight Revision 


2 


7/16/69 


1.742/1.729 was 1.747/1.734 


3 


7/16/69 


Note 8 Relocated 




8/11/69 


Issued 




9/18/69 


Released 


A 


5/12/70 


See SF3210686 Rev A 


B 


10/21/70 


Surface "J" Added 


C 


10/21/70 


Notes 8 & 9 Added 


D 


10/21/70 


Note Added 


E 


11/17/71 


4 was 3 


F 


3/2/72 


1.743/1.728 was 1.742/1.729 


G 


3/28/72 


Was .005 T.I.R. 




Figure P2-10 



♦Information Courtesy of American Motors. 



35 



GEOMETRIC 
CONSTRUCTIONS 



3 



3-1 INTRODUCTION 

Geometric constructions are the building blocks of drafting. Every 
drawing, regardless of its difficulty, is a composite of geometric shapes. 
A rectangle is four straight lines and four right angles. A cam is a series 
of interconnected arcs of various radii. Every draftsman must have a 
fundamental knowledge of geometric constructions if he is to progress 
to the more difficult format and layout concepts required by most 
drawings. 

This chapter is set up for easy reference. Each page contains one 
method of doing one geometric construction. Both classical methods 
and those requiring drafting equipment are presented. No attempt has 
been made to avoid redundancy, and each method is completely 
described within the page on which it is presented. A list of all construc- 
tions described in this chapter is given below: 



SUBJECT Page 

3-1 Introduction 36 

3-2 Points and Lines 38 

3-3 Add and Subtract Lines 39 

3-4 Parallel Lines— First Method 40 

3-5 Parallel Lines— Two Triangle Method 41 

3-6 Bisect a Line— First Method 42 

3-7 Bisect a Line— Second Method 43 

3-8 Divide a Line into Any Number of Equal Parts 44 

3-9 Divide a Line into Proportional Parts 45 

3-10 Fillets-Right Angles Only 46 

3-11 Fillets— Any Angle 47 

3-12 Rounds— Any Angle 48 

3-13 Hexagon-First Method 49 

3-14 Hexagon— Second Method 50 

3-15 Hexagon— Third Method 51 

3-16 Hexagon— Fourth Method 52 

3-17 Hexagon— Fifth Method 53 

3-18 Pentagon— How to Draw 54 



Sec. 3-1 Introduction 37 

3-19 Pentagon— Definition 55 

3-20 Octagon 56 

3-21 Fillet— Two Circles 57 

3-22 Round— Two Circles 58 

3-23 Fillet— Concave Circle to a Line 59 

3-24 Round— Convex Circle to a Line 60 

3-25 S-curve (Reverse or Ogee Curve) 61 

3-26 Approximate Ellipse 62 

3-27 Bisect an Angle 63 

3-28 Parabola 64 



38 



Geometric Constructions 



Chap. 3 



3-2 POINTS AND LINES 



A point, to a draftsman, is defined by the intersec- 
tion of two construction lines. 
Note: 

A dot should not be used to define a point because 
a dot may be easily confused with other marks on the 
drawing and thereby cause errors. 




Point 



Point 



A line, to a draftsman, is an object line connecting 
two or more points. 

Note: 

The accuracy of a curved line depends on the num- 
ber points used to define it. The number of points used 
depends on the accuracy required for the particular curve. 





Line 



Sec. 3-3 Add and Subtract Lines 

3-3 ADD AND SUBTRACT LINES 



39 



R. 



Given : Line 1 -2 of length X and line 3 -4 of length 




Problem: Add line 1-2 to 3-4. 
1. Construct a line and define point 1 anywhere 
along it. 



R. 



Given: Line 1-2 of length X and line 3-4 of length 
Problem: Subtract line 3-4 from line 1-2. 




2. Using a compass set on point 1, construct an 
arc of radius X. 

3. Using a compass set on the intersection of the 
arc constructed in step 2 and the line constructed in 
step 1, construct an arc of radius R as shown. Line 1-4 
is equal to line 1-2 plus line 3-4. 




Construction Line 



3. Using a compass set on the intersection of the 
arc constructed in step 2 and the line constructed in 
step 1, construct an arc of radius R as shown. 



Line 1-4 equals line 1-2 minus line 3-4. 



1. Construct a line and define point 1 anywhere 
along it. 

2. Using a compass set on point 1, construct an 
arc of radius X . 




Construction 
Line 



40 Geometric Constructions 

3-4 PARALLEL LINES-FIRST METHOD 



Chap. 3 



Given: Line 1-2 and distance D. 

r — *i^ D 
i 1 



Problem: Construct a line parallel to line 1-2 at 
distance D. 



2. Construct another arc of radius D as shown. 




Any- 
where along 
Line 1-2 



1. Using a compass set anywhere along line 1-2, 
construct an arc of radius D as shown. 




Anywhere along 
Line 1-2 



3. Construct a line tangent to both arcs. 



Line parallel to Line1-2 




Sec. 3-5 



Parallel Lines— Two Triangle Method 



41 



3-5 PARALLEL LINES-TWO 
TRIANGLE METHOD 



™ 



Given: Line 1-2 and distance/). 



Problem: Construct a line parallel to line 1-2 at 
a distance D, 



4. Construct a line along the edge of the 30-60-90 
as shown. 



5. Mark off a distance D from line 1-2 along the 
line constructed in step 4. 



1. Align the shortest leg of a 30-60-90 triangle 
with line 1-2. 

2. Place the hypothenuse of a 45-45-90 triangle 
against the hypothenuse of the 30-60-90 triangle. 

3. Holding the 45-45-90 triangle firmly and in 
place, slide the 30-60-90 along the hypothenuse of the 
45-45-90 as shown. 




30-60-90 



45-45-90 



Slide the\ 
30-60-90 

1 

Hold firm 
and in place 



Construct 

a line along 

the edge of the 

triangle 
2 




6. Realign the triangles to line 1-2 and slide the 
30-60-90 until it is a distance D from line 1-2. 



7. Construct a line along the shortest leg of the 
30-60-90 through distance D parallel to line 1-2. 




Note: °A T-square may be used in lieu of a second 
triangle. 

"The line used to locate distance D from 
line 1-2 in step 5 is perpendicular to line 
1-2. 



42 Geometric Constructions 

3-6 BISECT A LINE-FIRST METHOD 



Chap. 3 



Given: Line 1-2. 



Problem: Divide line 1-2 into two equal parts. 



1. Construct an arc of radius R. Use point 1 as 



center. 



R = any radius of greater length than Vi line 1-2. 




center. 



and 4. 



2. Construct an arc of radius R. Use point 2 as 

r. 

3. Define the intersection of the arcs as points 3 




4 . Connect points 3 and 4 with a construction line. 

5. Define point 5 where line 3-4 intersects line 
1-2. Line 1-5 = line 5-2. 




Note: This is the classical method as taught in 
plane geometry. 



Sec. 3-7 



Bisect A Line— Second Method 



43 



3-7 BISECT A LINE-SECOND METHOD 



Given: ne 1-2. 



Problem: Divide line 1-2 into two equal parts. 




2. Repeat step 1 this time constructing the 45° 
line through point 2. 

3. Define the intersection of the construction 
lines as point 3. 



Note: This method relies on drafting equipment 
for completion. Any angle may be used in steps 1 and 2 
as long as they are equal. 




1. Align the T-square with line 1-2 and using a 
45-45-90 triangle as a guide, construct a line 45° to 
line 1-2 through point 1. 




4. Draw a line through point 3 perpendicular to 
line 1-2 which intersects line 1-2. 

5. Define point 4 as shown. Line 1-4 = line 4-2. 



44 



Geometric Constructions 



Chap. 3 



3-8 DIVIDE A LINE INTO ANY 
NUMBER OF EQUAL PARTS 



Given: Line 1-2. 



Problem: Divide line 1-2 into five equal parts. 



2. Mark off five equal spaces along line 1-X and 
construct a line 2-7. 




Note: Any size space may be used as long as they 
are all equal in length. 



Note: This method is good for any number of 
equal parts, not just for the five shown. Once 1-X has 
been drawn, mark off as many spaces as needed. Re- 
member that the spaces must be of equal length. 




1. Construct a line A-X at any acute angle to 
line 1-2. 



3. Draw lines 6-F, b-E, 4-D, and 3-C parallel to 
line 2-7. 




1-C = C-D = D-E = E-F = F-2. 



Sec. 3-9 



Divide A Line Into Proportional Parts 



45 



3-9 DIVIDE A LINE INTO 
PROPORTIONAL 
PARTS 



Given: Line 1-2. 



1. Add up the total number of proportional parts 
required and use the total derived as if the problem were 
to divide the line into equal parts. 



Problem: Divide line 1-2 into proportion*] parts 
of 1, 3, and 5. 




Any acute angle 



1 
3 
5 



See section 2. Divide a line into any number of 
equal parts. 



2. Mark off the required proportional parts. 





9 Equal parts 



Note: This method is good for any number of 
parts and any ratio, not just for the 1,3, and 5 shown. 



46 Geometric Constructi6ns 

3-10 FILLETS-RIGHT ANGLES ONLY 



Chap. 3 



Given: Right angle and radius R. 



+-=— r 



Problem: Draw a fillet of radius R tangent to 
angle 1-0-2. 



3. Construct two more arcs of radius R. Use 
points 3 and 4 as centers. 




4. Define point 5 where, the arcs centered at 
points 3 and 4 intersect. 



1. Construct an arc of radius R. Use point as 



center. 




2. Define points 3 and 4 where the arc intersects 
lines 0-1 and 0-2. 




m 2 

>J5. Draw a fillet of radius R. Use point 5 as center, 
tangent to lines 0-1 and 0-2. 



Note: 'This method is good only for right angles. 

•For small radii, use a circle template and draw 
fillet directly. 



ft 



Sec. 3-11 



Fillets— Any Angle 



47 



3-11 FILLETS-ANY ANGLE 



Given: Angle 2-1-3 and radius R. 



h-=H 



Problem: Draw a fillet of radius R tangent to 
angle 2-1-3. 



2. Construct a line parallel to line 1-2 at a dis- 
tance R. 



R 



J 



'T 



\ 



L 



3. Define the intersection of the two constructed 
parallel lines as point 4. 



^T 



1 



1. Construct a line parallel to line 1-3 at a dis- 
tance R, 



4. Draw a fillet of radius R tangent to angle 2-1-3. 



^K 



Note; -This method is good, not only for the right 

angle as shown, but also for any angle, acute 
or obtuse. 

"For small radii, use a circle template and draw 
the fillet directly. 



48 Geometric Constructions 

3-12 ROUNDS-ANY ANGLE 



Chap. 3 



Given: Angle 1-0-2 and radius R. 
Problem: Draw a round of radius R tangent to 
angle 1-0-2. 



I 1 



2. Construct a line parallel to line 0-1 at a dis> 
tance R . 




1. Construct a line parallel to line 0-2 at a dis- 
tance R. 



f. 

K 



4. Draw a round of radius R. Use point 3 as center, 
tangent to angle 1-0-2. 



3. Define the intersection of the two constructed 
parallel lines as point 3. 




Sec. 3-1 3 Hexagon-First Method 

3-13 HEXAGON-FIRST METHOD 



49 



Problem: Draw a hexagon D across the corners. 



1. Construct a circle of diameter D. 



., . Diameter ,. 

Note: = radius. Set compass to radius 

dimension. £ 



2. Using a compass, mark off six distances — as 
shown. 2 




_D 
2 




2 

Start at any 
point 



Note: This is the classical geometric method and 
is not generally used by draftsmen because it makes , 
positioning of the hexagon difficult. 



-_ D 




3. Draw in the hexagon. 



50 Geometric Constructions 

3-14 HEXAGON-SECOND METHOD 



Chap. 3 



Problem: Draw a hexagon S across the corners. 



1. Construct a circle of diameter S. 



Note: Diameter = radius. Set compass to radius 
dimension. 



3. Using points 2 and 3 as center, construct two 
arcs of radius S/2. 



2. Define points 2 and 3 as shown; 





4. Define points 4, 5, 6, and 7 as shown. 




1 



5. Draw in the hexagon. 



s 



Sec. 3-15 Hexagon-Third Method 

3-15 HEXAGON-THIRD METHOD 



51 



Problem: Construct a hexagon A across the cor- 
ners. 



1. Construct a circle of diameter A. 



2. Using a 60°-triangle, construct lines 60° to 
the horizontal as shown. 



4. "Construct lines 1-2 and 3-4. 




3. Define points 1, 2, 3, and 4. 





5. Draw in the hexagon. 



52 Geometric Constructions 

3-16 HEXAGON-FOURTH METHOD 



Chap. 3 



Problem: Construct a hexagon B across the corners. 
1. Construct a circle of diameter B. 



2. Using a 30° -triangle, construct lines 30° to the 
horizontal as shown. 



4. Construct lines 1-2 and 3-4. 




3. Define points 1, 2, 3, and 4. 





5. Draw in the hexagon. 



Sec. 3-17 Hexagon— Fifth Method 

3-17 HEXAGON-FIFTH METHOD 



53 



Problem: Construct a hexagon C across the flats. 



1. Construct a circle of diameter C. 



3. Using a 30° -triangle, construct lines tangent to 
the circle 30° to the horizontal as shown. 




30 w to the 
horizontal 



2. Construct two vertical lines tangent to the circle. 




C DIA 




4. Draw in the hexagon. 



54 Geometric Constructions 

3-18 PENTAGON-HOW TO DRAW 



Chap. 3 



Problem: Draw a pentagon inscribed in a circle of 
diameter A. 



1. Construct a circle of diameter A. 

2. Define points 0, 1, and 2 as shown. 

3. Bisect line 0-1 and define the midpoint 
as point 3. 

4. Define point 4 as shown. 

5. Using a compass set on point 3, construct an 
arc through point 4 and line 2-0. 

6. Define the intersection of the arc constructed 
in step 5 and line 2-0 as point 5. 





8. Define the intersection of the arc constructed 
in step 7 and the circle as point 6. 



7. Using a compass set on point 4, construct an 
arc through point 5 and the edge of the circle. 




9. Using a compass, mark off the distance 4-6 
around the circumference of the circle as shown. 

10. Draw in the pentagon. 



Sec. 3-1 9 Pentagon— Definition 

3-19 PENTAGON-DEFINITION 



55 



Define a pentagon 



— 7? 



1.1 7558 R 




Note: This information has been included as a 
reference to help in drawing pentagons. 



56 



Geometric Constructions 



Chap. 3 



3-20 OCTAGON 



Problem : Draw an octagon D across the flats. 
1. Draw a circle of diameter D. 




2. Construct four tangent lines as shown. 




D DIA 



3. Construct four lines, 45° to the horizontal, 
tangent to the circle as shown. 




^— 45 v to the 
horizontal 



4. Draw in the octagon. 



Sec. 3-21 Fillet-Two Circles 

3-21 FILLET-TWO CIRCLES 



57 



Given: Circles X and Y and radius R. 



H h 




1. Construct an arc of radius X + R. Use point 1 
as center. 



x+R 



Problem: Draw a fillet of radius R tangent to 
circles X and Y. 



2. Construct an arc of radius Y + R. Use point 2 
as center. 



y+R 





(See Section 3-3, Add and Subtract Lines.) 



4. Using point 3 as center, draw a fillet of radius 
R tangent to the two circles. 



3. Define the intersection of the two arcs as point 3. 







58 Geometric Constructions 

3-22 ROUND-TWO CIRCLES 



Chap. 3 



Given: Circles x and y and radius R. 
Problem: Draw a round of radius R tangent to 
circles x and y. 




2. Construct an arc of radius R-y. Use point 2 as 
center. 

3. Define the intersection of the two arcs as 
point 3. 




R-y 



1. Construct an arc of radius R-x> Use point 1 
as center. 

(See Section 3-3, Add and Subtract Lines.) 




R-x 



4. Using point 3 as center, draw an arc of radius 
R tangent to the two circles. 




Sec. 3-23 



Fillet— Concave Circle To a Line 



59 



3-23 FILLET-CONCAVE CIRCLE 
TO A LINE 



R. 



Given: A circle of radius X t line 1-2, and a radius 



Problem : Draw a fillet of radius R tangent to a 
circle and a line. 




2. Construct a line parallel to line 1-2 at a dis- 
tance R. 



3. Define the intersection of the arc (X + R) and 
the line parallel to line 1-2 as point 4. 



1. Construct an arc of radius X + R. Use point 1 
as center. 




X+R 



4. Using point 4 as center, draw in a fillet of 
radius R. 




60 



Geometric Constructions 



Chap, 3 



3-24 ROUND-CONVEX CIRCLE 
TO ALINE 



Given: Circle x, line 1-2, and fillet radius R. 




1. Construct a circle of radius x - R. 



Problem: Draw a round tangent to a circle of 
radius x and line 1-2. 



2. Construct a line parallel to line 1-2 at a dis- 
tance R. 




3. Define the intersection of the circle (x - R) 
and the line parallel to line 1-2 as point 3. 



x-R 
(radius) 




(See Section 3-3, Subtracting Lines) 



4. Draw a round of radius R. Use point 3 as center. 




Sec. 3-25 



S-Curve (Reverse or Ogee Curve) 



61 



3-25 S-CURVE (REVERSE OR 
OGEE CURVE) 



1. Construct line 1-2. 

2. Divide line 1-2 into four equal parts. 




3. Construct perpendiculars from points 1 and 2 
such that they intersect the quarter bisect lines as shown. 




4. Define the intersects of step 3 as points 3 and 4. 



JL 



Note: The S-curve need not be symmetrical. Asym- 
metrical curves may be constructed, but the method is 
not covered in this book. 



5. Using points 3 and 4 as centers, draw in curves 
of radii 3-1 and 4-2. 




62 



Geometric Constructions 



Chap. 3 



3-26 APPROXIMATE ELLIPSE 



Given: A major axis of A-O-B and a minor axis of 



x-o-y 



Problem: Construct an approximate ellipse. 



1 Draw an arc of radius 0-A. Use point as a 
center such that it intersects point A and an extension of 
line y-O-X. 

2. Draw a straight line between points X and tf. 

3! Draw arc X-2 as shown. 

4. Define the intersection of arc (X-2) and line 
X'B as point 3. . . Y— 2 



B 



5. Bisect line 3-5 and draw the bisect line so 
that it intersects an extension of the line X-O-y. Define 
this intersection as point 5. 

Bisect of 
line 3-B 




4-B 



6. Define the intersection of the bisect line and 
line 0-B as point 4. 




7. Using point 5 as center, draw an arc of radius 
5-X as shown. Also draw an arc of radius 4-B as shown. 
These two arcs will generate half of ellipse. Draw the 
half by symmetry. 




Sec. 3-27 Bisect an Angle 

3-27 BISECT AN ANGLE 



63 



Given: Angle 1-0-2 




Problem: Bisect angle 1-0-2. 



2. Define points 3 and 4 where the arc intersects 
lines 0-1 and 0-2. 




4. Define the intersection of the two arcs as 
point 5. 



center. 



1. Construct an arc of radius R. Use point as 




3. Using points 3 and 4 as centers, construct two 
more arcs of radius R m shown. 



5. Construct a line 0-5, 






Angle 1-0-5 = Angle 5-0-2. 



64 



Geometric Constructions 



Chap. 3 



3-28 PARABOLA 



Problem: Draw a parabola whose major axis is 
twice the minor axis. 



Major Axis 




Minor Axis 



2. Construct lines from the first point on the ma- 
jor axis to the last point on the minor axis, etc. (1-10, 
2-9,3-8,4-7, 5-6) 




3. Define points 11, 12, 13, and 14 as shown. 



Note: "In this example the major axis points are V6 
apart and the minor axis points are V* apart. 
•The accuracy of the parabola depends on the 
number of points used to define it. The more 
points, the greater the accuracy. 



1. Lay out points making those on the major axis 
twice as far apart as those on the minor axis. 



o' & 7' tf wtd 



The number of points on each axis must be equal. 



4. Draw a parabola by using a French curve and 
connecting points 5-11-12-13-14-10. 




1 6 l T 3 



Problems 0* 

PROBLEMS 

3-1 You are given a line 1-15/16 long. Bisect it. 

3-2 You are given a line 2.36 long. Bisect it. 

3-3 Draw two parallel lines 15/16 apart. 

3-4 Draw two parallel lines VA apart. 

3-5 Draw two parallel lines 2.063 apart. 

3-6 You are given a line 2-1/8 long. Divide it into 7 equal parts. 

3-7 You are given a line 3 l 4 long. Divide it into 15 equal parts. 

3-8 You are given a line 1.68 long. Divide it into 3 equal parts. 

3-9 You are given a line 1-7/8 long. Divide it into proportional 
parts of 2, 4, and 7. 

3-10 You are given a line 2-9/16 long. Divide it into proportional 
parts of 1, 4, 3, and 5. 

3-11 You are given a line 2.78 long. Divide it into proportional parts 
of 3, 4, and 9. 

3-12 You are given lines of 1-1/16 and 5/8 long. Graphically add them. 
3-13 You are given lines of 1.75 and 0.625 long. Graphically add them. 

3-14 You are given a line 2-3/8 long. Subtract a line 1-3/16 long from 

it. 

3-15 You are given a line 1-7/8 long. Subtract a line 15/16 long from it. 

3-16 You are given a line 1.28 long. Subtract a line 0.80 long from it. 

3-17 You are given a 37° angle. Draw a fillet of radius %. 

3-18 You are given a 123° angle. Draw a fillet of radius 1-3/8. 

3-19 You are given a 90° angle. Draw a round of radius 7/8. 

3-20 You are given a 60° angle. Draw a round of radius 1.20. 

3-21 Draw a hexagon VA across the comers. 

3-22 Draw a hexagon 2-3/16 across the corners. 

3-23 Draw a hexagon 1.80 across the corners. 

3-24 Draw a hexagon 80 mm across the corners. 

3-25 Draw a hexagon 2 across the flats. 

3-26 Draw a hexagon 2-9/16 across the flats. 

3-27 Draw a pentagon inscribed within a 2% diameter circle. 

3-28 Draw an octagon inscribed within a 1-7/8 diameter circle. 

3-29 You are given two circles of VA and 7/8 in diameter and located 
VA apart. Draw a fillet between them of radius %. 

3-30 You are given two circles of 1.75 and 1.10 in diameter and lo- 
cated 1.60 apart. Draw a fillet between them of radius .90. 



66 



Geometric Constructions 



Chap. 3 



3-31 You are given two circles of 1V4 and 1V4 in diameter and located 
2V4 apart. Draw a round between them of radius 2V6. 

3-32 You are given a circle 1-7/16 in diameter located 2-1/8 above a 
line. Draw a fillet between them of radius 1-1/16. 

3-33 You are given a circle 2% in diameter located 9/16 above a line. 
Draw a round between them of radius 7/8. 

3-34 Draw an approximate ellipse with a minor axis of 1 and a major 
axis of IV2. 

3-35 Draw an approximate ellipse with a minor axis of 2.25 and a ma- 
jor axis of 3.80. 

3-36 Draw a parabola whose major axis is l l A times the minor axis. 

3-37 Draw a parabola whose major axis is two times the minor axis. 

3-38 You are given an angle of 60°. Bisect it. 

3-39 You are given an angle of 50°. Bisect it. 

3-40 You are given an angle of 108°. Bisect it. 

3-41 You are given an angle of 42.5°. Bisect it. 



Redraw the following shapes: 




3-43 



.50 01 A 
4 PLACES 



2.75 DIA 



4.00 




1.13R 



1.13 DIA 



Problems 



67 



1.30 a 



2.00R 




.88 R 



3-45 



1.13 n 




3.00 R 



8101 A 



75 H 



STRAIGHT 
LINE 



.75 R 
2 PLACES 



3-46 Use B size paper. 



75R 
2 PLACES 



1.25DIA 



1.38 R 



1.75 01 A 



5.00 




3-47 



.94 DIA 



6S 



1,75 R 



Geometric Constructions 

3-48 



Chap. 3 




75 R-2 PLACES 




1.60R 



3-49 



2.88 




,50 DIA 
5 PLACES 



.73 fl 
TYPICAL 

,19R 



P3-*t^ 



2.75R 



HEXAGON! 
20 ACROSS 
THE FLATS 



3-50 Millimeters. 




4 PLACES 



Problems 



69 



3-51 Use B size paper. 



.50 R 
2 PLACES 



.25 R 
5 PLACES 



1.38DIA- 



2.00- 



.380IA- 



810IA 




4.00 



2.00 



1.00 



3.81 *- 



5.19 



8.00 



PROJECTION THEORY 



4 



1 





sr^;-" ,, '*-; 



Figure 4-0 Many views of an object are needed to present a clear 
idea of the object's shape. Photograph courtesy of General Motors 
Corp. 



4-1 INTRODUCTION 

The purpose of a technical drawing is to communicate information. 
As in any kind of communication, it is easy to know what you want to 
say but sometimes very difficult to make yourself understood. 

From the time a customer places his initial order until the finished 
product is delivered, many people of varying technical skills and back- 
grounds will contribute to help satisfy the demands of the order. An 
engineer and draftsman design the product and prepare the necessary 
drawings. The drawings are then used progressively by a planner to 
price and time the job, by a buyer to order necessary manufacturing 
stock, by a shop foreman to schedule and assign the work, by a machin- 
ist to actually make the parts, by an inspector to make sure that the 
work has been done properly, by an assembler to put the pieces to- 
gether, by another inspector, and so on. Each member of this hypo- 
thetical chain takes from the drawings information that he needs for 
his particular function. It is, therefore, easy to see why the drawings 
must be accurate and clear, free from ambiguities or misleading repre- 
sentations. Just as the years of written communication have led to 
rules and conventions, so years of manufacturing and production 
experience have led to drafting rules and conventions that help prevent 
errors. 



4-2 ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS 

One of the most useful systems used by draftsmen to help assure 
accurate communication is orthographic projection. 

Orthographic projections are views of an object taken at right angles to 
the object and arranged in specific relative positions on the drawing. 

There is an infinite number of possible orthographic projections— there 
is an infinite number of ways to look at an object— but the views most 
commonly used are front, top, bottom, right side, left side, and rear 
(see Figure 4-1). 

Six views are not generally required, for most objects may be 
completely 'defined in three views: front, top, and right (corresponding 
to height, width, and depth). Drafting convention calls for these views 
to be specifically placed on a drawing, and any variance is an error. 
Figure 4-2 shows the three views in correct position. Figure 4-3 shows 
two examples of positioning errors. 

Each orthographic view is taken at right angles to the object it is 
defining. It is not a picture, such as an artist would draw, but a two- 
dimensional representation which, for the sake of technical accuracy, 



72 



Projection Theory 



Chap. 4 





Top 











Front 








Rear 

- 





Bottom 



Figure 4-1 A front, top, bottom, right side, left side, and rear 
views of an object. 





Top 









Front 



SJdo 



Figure 4-2 Three views of an object located in correct relative 
positions. 



Sec. 4-2 



Orthographic Projections 



n 




Front 



Front 




Figure 4-3 Orthographic views which are not positioned correctly. 



has given up perspective. There is no shading and no attempt to "pic- 
ture" the object. Each view presents only one face or one piece of the 
total information. Orthographic views are dependent on each other for 
a complete definition of the object. (There are objects that require 
fewer than three views, but these will be covered later.) In the top view 
in Figure 4-4, which surface is higher? There is no way to tell from this 
one orthographic view. Other views are needed before an answer may 
be given. 





' 




Top View 




Figure 4-4 Given a top view of an object, which surface is 
higher? Other views are needed before an answer can be formu- 
lated. 



74 



Projection Theory 



Chap. 4 



4-3 PRINCIPAL PLANE LINE 

Drawings are divided into zones. Each zone contains one ortho- 
graphic view along with all information pertinent to that view. The 
zones are separated by crossed (at 90°) construction lines called princi- 
pal plane lines which are similar to a mathematical coordinate system. 
They are omitted on most finished drawings, but their presence is tacit. 
They will be included for the first problems in order to help establish 
the importance of the separation and relative position of views. 

Principal plane lines are defined in Figure 4-5(a). Figure 4-5(b) 
shows how principal planes lines were initially developed. 



Figure 4-5(a) Principal plane lines. 



TOP view 
zone 



Front 




FRONT view 
zone 



Right 

Side 



Front 





Principal 

Plane Lines 



RIGHT SIDE view 
zone 



Right 

Side 



Front 



Figure 4-5(b) How principal plane lines were initially developed. 




Principal 
Plane Lines 



Right 
Side 



Sec. 4-4 

4-4 POINTS 



Points 



75 



Projection theory is the study of how to transfer information from 
one orthographic view to another. Often, two views of an object may 
be visualized, or parts of each view may be drawn, but the completed 
drawing remains clouded. Projection theory enables the bits and pieces 
to be used together to arrive at a finished drawing. 

Reduced to its simplest form, projection theory may be used to 
transfer a single point from one view to another. Figure 4-6 presents 
the problem of finding the right side view of a point where the front 
and top views are given. Figure 4-7 shows the solution. 



GIVEN: Front and top views of point 1. 
PROBLEM: Draw the side view of point 1. 



'+ 



Top 



Front 



,+ 



Right Side 



Figure 4-6 Top and front views of point 1. 



SOLUTION: 



'+ 



Mitre Line (at 45°) 



> 



-f" 



Figure 4 -7 (a) 




RIGHT SIDE view 
of point 1 



Figure 4-7(b) 



76 



Projection Theory 



Chap. 4 



1. Project the front view of point 1 into the right side view zone. 
This is done by drawing a horizontal construction line parallel 
to the horizontal principal plane line. The tendency here is to 
draw the projection line too short meaning extension may be re- 
quired later on. All we know at this time is that the right side 
view is somewhere along the projection line. 

2. Draw a line 45° up and to the right from the intersecting point 
of the principal plane lines. This is called a mitre line. 

3. Project the top view of point 1 into the right side view zone. 
This is done by drawing a horizontal construction line to the 
right, parallel to the horizontal principle plane line until it 
touches the 45° -mitre line. When the projection line touches 
the mitre line, it turns the corner, Le. t it goes from horizontal 
to vertical- To continue the projection line, draw a vertical 
construction line, parallel to the vertical principal plane line, 
extending down into the right side view zone. As in step 1, 
don't be stingy with the lead; draw the projection line through 
and beyond the horizontal projection line. 

4. The intersection of the two projection lines is the right side 
view of point 1. Label it. 

Several additional points should be made before leaving this prob- 
lem. The location of the front view of point 1 in relation to the top 
view is not random. The vertical line between the front and top views 
is parallel to the vertical principal plane line. Figure 4-8 shows three 
views of point 1 and the projection lines used to go from view to view. 
The point views and lines form a perfect rectangle (a four-sided figure 
with four right angles). This projection rectangle enables the draftsman 
to find any third view of a point when he is given the two other views. 
This means that if we consider only three principle views (top, front, 
and right side), there are only three possible projection problems. 



TOP— RIGHT SIDE 



FRONT — TOP 




RIGHT SIDE — FRONT 



Figure 4-8 Projection rectangle. 



Sec. 4-5 



Lines 



77 



1. When you are given the front and top, draw the right side. 

2. When you are given the front and right side, draw the top. 

3. When you are given the top and right side, draw the front. 

The sample problems in Figures 4-9 and 4-10 are examples of the other 
two possible point projection problems. Study them before proceeding 
to the next section. 



GIVEN: Top and right side views of point 2. 
PROBLEM: Draw front view. 



GIVEN: Front and right side views of point 3. 
PROBLEM: Draw top view. 







3+ 


+3 



% 



+, 



SOLUTION: 



TOP view- 
of point 3 



.+ 



+. 



SOLUTION: 



FRONT view 
of point 2 



'+ 




Figure 4-9 



Figure 4-10 



4-5 LINES 

The projection of lines between views follows directly from point 
projection theory if we consider the axiom: 



To a draftsman, a line is a visible line that connects two 
or more points. 



Axiom 4-1 



It follows then that lines may be projected by projecting the points 
that define them. 

Figure 4-11 presents the problem of finding a right side view when 
the front and top views are given. Figure 4-12 is the solution and was 
arrived at by the following: 



1. Projecting point 1 into the right side view (see Figure 4-1). 



78 



Projection Theory 



Chap. 4 



GIVEN: Front and top views of line 1-2. 
PROBLEM: Draw side view. 









1 


^~2 






,2 




V 







Figure 4-11 



SOLUTION; 





Figure 4-12(a) 



Figure 4-1 2(b) 



Sec. 4-5 



Lines 



79 



2. Projecting point 2 into the right side view. 

3. Connecting points 1 and 2 with an object line. 

Step 3 is the right side view of line 1-2. 

One aspect of line projection that could cause confusion is a double- 
point projection. This is clarified by the following axiom: 



The end view of a straight line is a point (really a double 
point). 



Axiom 4-2 



Figure 4-13 is an example of a double-point projection. The solu- 
tion is derived exactly as shown in Figure 4-11, except for step 3. 
Points 1 and 2 cannot be joined by an object line because the line ex- 
tends into the paper and therefore appears as a double point. This may 
be visualized if you hold a pencil horizontal to the ground and rotate 
it until you are looking directly at the point with the eraser end directly 
behind the point. If the point represents point 1 and if the eraser repre- 
sents point 2, you now have a model of the end view of a line. 

Figures 4-14, 4-15, and 4-16 are samples of solved line projection 
problems. Study them before proceeding to the next section. 



GIVEN: Front and top view of line 5-6. 
PROBLEM: Draw right side view. 



S H h 6 



GIVEN: Front and right side views of line 4-5. 
PROBLEM: Draw top view. 



I. 



SOLUTION: 



SOLUTION: 




RIGHT SIDE view 
of line 5-6 



*\ * M 

"5 r 5 



Figure 4-13 End view of a line. 



Figure 4-14 



80 



Projection Theory 



Chap. 4 



GIVEN: Front and right side view of line 8-9. 
PROBLEM: Draw top view. 



GIVEN: Top and right side views of line 7-8. 
PROBLEM: Draw front view. 



/ 



SOLUTION: 



TOP view 
of line 8-9 



SOLUTION: 





Figure 4-16 



4-6 PLANES 

As line projection theory was derived from point projection theory, 
so plane projection theory follows directly from line projection theory 
if we consider the following axiom: 



To a draftsman, a plane is the area enclosed within a 
series of lines interconnected end to end. 



Axiom 4-3 



This differs from the geometric concept of planes in that it con- 
siders a plane a finite area, that is, an area with known boundaries. 

Figure 4-17 gives the front and top views of plane 1-2-3-4 and 
asks for the right side view. Figure 4-18 shows the solution which was 
arrived at by the following: 

1. Identify the lines that define the plane 1-2, 2-4, 4-3, and 3-1. 

2. Project the individual points 1, 2, 3, and 4 into the right side 
view (see Figure 3-7), 

3. Draw in with object lines the lines that define the plane. 



The lines drawn in step 3 define the right side view of plane 1-2- 



3-4. 



Sec. 4-6 



Planes 



31 



GIVEN: Front and top views of plane 1-2-3-4. 
PROBLEM: Draw right side view. 





SOLUTION: 




Figure 4-17 



Figure 4-18 



In line theory we found that the end view of a line was a double 
point. A similar situation appears in plane theory which is explained 
by the following axiom: 



The end view of a plane is a line (really several lines 
directly behind each other). 



Axiom 4-4 



This may be verified by holding a sheet of paper horizontal to the 
ground and rotating it until you are looking directly at one edge. Al- 
though it is a plane, the sheet appears as a line. 

Figure 4-19 is a sample problem involving the end view of a 
plane. Points 1, 2, 3, and 4 are double points or end views of lines. 
Line 1-3 is located directly behind line 2-4 and is therefore hidden 
from view. Figure 4-19 is a good example of why orthographic views 
are dependent on each other to present a complete picture of an ob- 
ject. By itself, the right side view is not only incomplete, it is also mis- 
leading. 



GIVEN: Front and top views of plane 1-2-3-4. 
PROBLEM: Draw the right side view. 



Figure 4-19 



SOLUTION: 




82 



Projection Theory 



Chap. 4 



4-7 CURVES 

So far we have considered only straight lines. Point, line, and plane 
projection theory may be extended to include curved lines if we con- 
sider the following axioms: 

To a draftsman, a curved line is a visible line connecting 
three or more points which form a smooth, nonlinear 
line. Axiom 4-5 

To a draftsman, the accuracy of a curve is a function of 

the number of points used to define the curve. Axiom 4-6 

To draw a perfectly accurate curve would require an infinite num- 
ber of points. To do this is not only impossible, it is also impractical. 
Most curves may be very closely approximated by a finite number of 
points, and it is up to the draftsman to determine which level of ac- 
curacy is required and how many points he needs to achieve this level. 
Circles and perfect arcs are exceptions to the axioms because they may 
be drawn with perfect accuracy by using a compass. 

Figures 4-20 and 4-21 are examples of curved line projection prob- 
lems and Figure 4-22 is an example of a plane with a curved edge. The 
solution to each of these problems is based on the concept of point 
project theory as shown in Figures 4-7, 4-9, and 4-10. 



GIVEN: Front and right side views of curved line 1-2. 
PROBLEM: Draw top view. 





Figure 4-20 



Curves 




83 



1 - 


He — 








l 3 > 

4 


I J 




J 


-^tr -■ 




,1 




~*Y 


3* 




\ 


\/ A 








2 ST 



Figure 4-21(a) 



Figure 4-21(b) 



GIVEN: Front and top views of plane 1-2-3-4-5 
PROBLEM: Draw the aide view. 



P*« 



SOLUTION: 




1 2 




5 4 J 


( 


t 
r^..g 


-ii" 


\3 


i 


5 4 4,5 


) 



Figure 4-22 



84 



Projection Theory 

PROBLEMS 



Chap. 4 



Draw three views (front, top, and side) of the following points, lines, 
and planes. Include principal plane lines, mitre lines, and projection 
lines for each problem. Each square on the grid is 0.20 X 0.20. 

4-1 



IS 



11 



JZ 



zi 



13; 



sS 



4*5i 



Tl|L 



34 



Z 



EflOL. 



F.^nt 



2 



i 



l 



ij 



- 



4-2 



m 



BI 



Tlfl 



13 tf 



il 



3a 



i-Aitr: 



san*: 



IE: 



TT 



1 



3 



y 



Problems 



85 



4-3 



ill III "" "-H'TT 


a *— ~ ^ . 4h c 




■J' - " 


3 ~| 


j .. .. _ :: 


l .... IlJL 


..^ . . . ;.. 


1 . . .. i 






.r. j « 


N . ^ 1 


---, _ ^ ftiUL Z 


a 2 a£ .. ^ ^ 


-4 4 ... & 




d, . . e. f 




I 2 


-] ... Iqjl .j ^a 






4" --g -■■ 2* 


5....-S 56 I— .2 




j 


-34 li\~ IiulL 




i. a "2 M ~" 4""3l 




... 







4-4 



-..»■ ■ 



1 



lilt 



Jul 



E 



Bl 



?i 



TZC 



,■1 



> 



B£ 



< 



>' 



f v 



3 



■£ 



5: 



F 



■II 



J 



SoiM 



99 






86 

4-5 



Projection Theory 



Chap. 4 



i^isi 



IljL 



P 

U— - 



i 



i 



aa 



.Esq] 



35*[ 



05: 



l3|t 



i<5=Esi 






m 



31 



:?i! 



ircilL 



THREE VIEWS 
OF AN OBJECT 



5 







Figure 5-0 A front view of a BMW R90S. Photograph courtesy 
of Bob Braverman's Cycle Rider Publications, Inc. 



5-1 INTRODUCTION 

In this chapter we will extend the projection theory concepts of 
Chapter 4 to cover three-dimensional objects. The basic three views 
(front, top, and right side) and their relative locations on the drawing are 
the same for three-dimensional objects as they are for points, lines, and 
planes. Similarly, the techniques for projecting information from one 
view to another remain exactly the same. As we consider lines to be 
defined by points and we consider planes to be defined by lines, so we 
may consider three-dimensional objects to be defined by planes and, 
therefore, directly apply projection theory. 

We also introduce in this chapter the concept of object visualiza- 
tion. Object visualization is the ability to mentally picture an object in 
three dimensions when only orthographic views are given and to men- 
tally visualize the orthographic views of an object when only a three- 
dimensional picture is given. It is an important skill for a draftsman to 
develop. Each sample problem in this and the next six chapters will 
include both the orthographic views and a three-dimensional drawing, 
called an isometric drawing, of the objects to be studied so that an 
understanding of the object visualization may be developed. 



5-2 NORMAL SURFACES 

Figure 5-1 shows an object and a three-view orthographic drawing 
of that object. All surfaces in the object are normal, that is, at 90° to 
each other. The principal plane lines and the projection lines have been 
included, and points 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 have been defined. 




Figure 5-1 An object and a three view orthographic 
drawing of that object. 



Sec. 5-2 



Normal Surfaces 



89 





Figure 5-2 An object and a three view orthographic drawing of 
that object. 



Planes 1-2-3-4 and 2-3-5-6 have been numbered to demonstrate 
the application of projection theory to objects. Projection theory is 
directly applicable to three-dimensional objects if we consider the fol- 
lowing axiom: 



To a draftsman, an object is a volume enclosed within a 
series of interconnected planes. 



Axiom 5-1 



As we are able to analyze lines from points and analyze planes 
from lines, so we are able to analyze objects from planes. Planes 1-2-3-4 
and 2-3-5-6 are analyzed separately in Figure 5-2. All other surfaces 
that make up the object may be analyzed in the same way and then 
combined into a composite of planes which in turn form the three 
views of the object. 

Normally, a draftsman does not number all points on an object 
because he mentally sees his finished drawing before he draws it. This 
is not always true, however, because not every object may be mentally 
solved. Thus, draftsmen often use projection theory to help them derive 
and check surfaces about which they are unsure. Let us assume, for 
example, that surface 1-2-3-4 in Figure 5-2 has caused confusion and 
that we have numbered what we feel are the correct three views. We 
now wish to check our work. 

To check the proposed solution, start with point 1 and draw in 
the projection rectangle verifying the indicated locations of point 1. Do 
the same with line 1-2 and then with surface 1-2-3-4. All points, lines, 
and the plane check. Therefore, the drawn solution is correct. 

Figure 5-3 is another example of an object containing all normal 
surfaces. 



90 



Three Views of an Object 



Chap. 5 







Figure 5-3 An object and a three view orthographic drawing of 
that object. 



5-3 HIDDEN LINES 

Most objects contain lines (edges) that cannot be seen in all three 
views. The slot in Figure 5-4 appears in the top and right side view, but 
it is hidden in the front view. We must somehow represent the slot in 
the front view to insure that all views are consistent in the information 
they present. We do this by using hidden lines. 



Hidden lines are lines used to represent edges of an ob- 
ject that cannot be directly seen. 



Axiom 5-2 



Figure 5-4 An example of an object whose front view contains 
a hidden line. 




Sec. 5-3 



Hidden Lines 



91 



The hidden lines in the front view of the object shown in Figure 5-4 
represent the horizontal surface of the slot. 

Hidden lines are drawn by using dashes as explained in Figure 5-5. 
The actual length of the dashes may vary according to the situation as 
long as a 4 to 1 ratio is maintained between the dashes and the inter- 
mittent spaces. Since hidden lines are not as dark or as thick as object 
lines, you should be careful to make sure that there is a noticeable dif- 
ference between object lines and hidden lines. See Chapter 2 for further 
definition of kinds of lines. 

There are three rules that must be followed when drawing hidden 
lines. They have been developed to prevent confusion and misunder- 
standing in the use and interpretation of hidden lines. Figure 5-6 il- 
lustrates the rules. 



hW-4 

Figure 5-5 Hidden line configuration. 



Rule 1: Do not continue an object line into a hidden 
line. Always allow a small (1/16) gap. 



Axiom 5-3 




Figure 5-6(a) Do not continue a visible line into a hidden line; 
leave a gap. 



Rule 2: Show hidden corners as an intersection of hid- 
den lines, thereby specifically defining the location of 



the corner. 



Axiom 5-4 




Figure 5-6(b) Show hidden intersections by crossed hidden lines. 



Rule 3: Never draw parallel hidden lines with equal 
length dashes and spaces. Stagger the lengths so that 
each line is distinctive. Axiom 5-5 

figures 5-7, 5-8, 5-9, and 5-10 are further examples of hidden FitfUM R R , M «_„„ f . . . . 

lino nmWoma rlgure 5-6(c) Stagger the spacing of clow 

ime problems. parallel hidden lines. 







Figure 5-7 An example of an object whose orthographic views 
contain hidden lines. 




rui 




Figure 5-8 An example of an object whose orthographic views 
contain hidden lines. 



92 




r 



Figure 5-9 An example of an object whose orthographic views 
contain hidden lines. 






Figure 5-10 An example of an object whose orthographic views 
contain hidden lines. 



94 



Three Views of an Object 



Chap. 5 



5-4 INCLINED SURFACES 

Figure 5-11 shows an object that has an inclined surface 1-2-3-4. 
An inclined surface is one that is parallel to one, but not both, principal 
plane lines. Note that the top and right side views are approximately 
the same as those shown for the example in Figure 5-1 and note the 
incline of plane 1-2-3-4 may only be seen in the front view. This kind 
of visual ambiguity is unavoidable in orthographic views, and as shown 
here it emphasizes the importance of using all orthographic views to- 
gether to form a final solution to the problem. 

Figures 5-12 and 5-13 are other sample problems which include 
inclined surfaces. 







Figure 5-11 An object with an inclined surface 1-2-3-4. 



























Figure 5-12 An object with an inclined surface. 



Sec. 5-5 



Curved Surfaces 



95 









Figure 5-13 An object with inclined surfaces. 



5-5 CURVED SURFACES 

Figure 5-14 shows an object that has a curved surface. A curved 
surface is one that appears as a part of a circle (an arc of constant radius) 
in one of the orthographic views. Curved surfaces are similar to slanted 
surfaces in that they tend to generate ambiguous orthographic views. 

A unique characteristic of curved surfaces is the tangency line. 
Surface 1-2-3-4 in Figure 5-14 contains a tangency line 5-6 repre- 
sented by a phantom line, A tangency line represents the location at 
which the round portion of surface 1-2-3-4 flairs into (becomes tan- 
gent to) the flat horizontal portion. Because there is no edge here, a 



Figure 5-14 An object with a curved surface. 





6 

J 






13 5,6 



^ 



1.5 



36 



2,4 



96 



Three Views of an Object 



Chap. 5 



line would not be drawn in any of the views. Figure 5-15 shows an 
object in which the curved surface does form an edge with the lines 
labeled 7-8 and 9-10; thus, it requires an object line. Without excep- 
tion, you may always draw an visible line when the round surface forms 
an edge with the other surfaces. 

You cannot, however, always omit a line if a physical edge does 
not appear. Figure 5-16 gives two examples of objects that require lines 
in their orthographic views even though no edges actually exist on the 
object. Figure 5-17 is another example of an object that does not re- 
quire a line. 




r~ r 



f++ 



^l 




Figure 5-15 An object with a curved surface. 
Figure 5-16 Two objects with curved surfaces. 



I j 



^ 






Sec. 5-6 



Sketching 



97 



! ■ 
i 

l 
1 


i 

i 
i 
i 






f ^M 















Figure 5-17 An object with curved surfaces. 



As a rule, if a curve changes direction (goes from concave to con- 
vex, or vice versa) such that any part of it becomes parallel to one of 
the principal plane lines, a line is required. 



5-6 SKETCHING 

Before a draftsman begins the actual drawing of a new assignment 
he will usually make a sketch of the object involved. He then studies 
the sketch and tries to identify any problems that could arise when he 
makes his drawing. If any problems are found, he reworks his sketch 
until the problems are solved and his sketch has become a clear well- 
understood picture of his future drawing. A draftsman takes the time 
to create good sketches because it is much easier to correct freehand 
sketches than to correct finished drawings. The time he spends sketch- 
ing is more than regained when he creates his drawing because he avoids 
the problems he found and corrected while he was making his sketches 

Of course, learning to sketch is easier for those who have artistic 
ability, but anyone can learn to sketch. The following hints are offered 
to make it easier for you to learn to sketch: 

To make sketches of orthographic views (see Figure 5-18): 

SOLUTION: 

1. Use grid paper, graph paper, quadrapads, and so on. This kind 
of paper will help you to establish an approximate scale and 
thereby keep your sketches fairly proportioned. It will also 
help you to keep your lines straight. 



GIVEN: An object. 

PROBLEM: Sketch the front, top and 
right side views. 




Figure 5-1 8(a) 



98 



Three Views of an Object 



Chap. S 



2. Lightly sketch the overall shape of the object, as would be seen 
in the three basic orthographic views. 



- 

: : 

— >H ' j 

- 

L _l_ -1 


- 1 . T M 
i 

:: " : +=E:E t :=::i:~ 
EEE::--::±:=:::: 

: 



Figure 5-1 8(b) 



3. Lightly sketch in the specific details of the object. 


■ [TrH || [j 1 1 -111 

_ ■ — 



| j 1 1 -li 


1 I 1 1 1 i \\ II -UN 


; Z 



Figure 5-18(c) 



Sec. 5-6 



Sketching 



99 



4. When the desired shape is completed, darken in the important 
lines by using heavy, bold strokes. 



. 7T"~^ . 


. _ . . 




" 




. 





- 

- 




-i _ i 


- 




l ~" 


" 


" : 




n * 


? "" 


(<i 










""" _ 


. h 


i u 


_L _L 



Figure 5-1 8(d) 



To make a picture (isometric) sketch (see Figure 5-19): 

GIVEN: Three views of an object. 

PROBLEM : Sketch an isometric picture of the object. 



-0" "0- 



V 



ttt 
I I I 

J-U 



TTT 



u 



I I I 
111 



Figure 5-19(a) 



100 



Three Views of an Object 



Chap. 5 



SOLUTION: 

1. Draw a block whose length, width, and height are of approxi- 
mately the same proportions as those of the object to be 
sketched. Make the receding lines of the box 30°. 




Figure 5-19(b) 



2. Lightly sketch in the specific details of the object. 





Figure 5-19(c) 



Figure 5-19(d) 



3. When the desired shape is completed, darken in the important 
lines by using heavy, bold strokes. 




Figure 5-19(e) 



Sec. 5-7 



Visualization Techniques 



101 



5-7 VISUALIZATION TECHNIQUES 

Visualizing an object in three dimensions, given only the ortho- 
graphic views, has always been a problem for draftsmen. Drawing 
and sketching experience and good depth perception help, but there 
are always those problems that just "can't be seen." Two techniques 
used by draftsmen to help visualize difficult problems are model build- 
ing and surface coloring. 

Models offer the best visualization aids because they themselves 
are three-dimensional objects, but models are usually expensive and 
time-consuming to build. Figure 5-20 shows examples of some well- 
constructed models. To overcome the expense and time constraints, 
some draftsmen make models out of children's modeling clay. Figure 
5-20 shows an example. Clay models are not meant to be exact-scaled 
duplications, but rather approximate representations made to help a 
draftsman visualize the object being drawn; thus, the quality of clay 
models may vary according to personal requirements and situations. 





. 




Figure 5-20 Models used to help visualize. The model in the 
center is made from children's modeling clay, 



Figure 5-21 shows an example of surface coloring. Draftsmen 
generally color by using different colors {red, blue, etc.), but the example 
in Figure 5-21 was done by using various shades of gray. By coloring a 
surface with the same color in all the different views, the surface may 
be more easily identified in the various views and therefore more easily 
visualized. 



102 



Three Views of an Object 



Chap. 5 



__ 1 1 






Figure 5-21 An example of surface shading. 



PROBLEMS 



Draw or sketch, as assigned by your instructor, three views (front, top, 
and right side) of the following objects. Each triangle in the grid pattern 
is 0.20 on a side, except for problems 5-1 and 5-3 which-use a 0.25 on 
a side grid pattern. 



. 




5-2 




Pro b ferns 






5-7 




5-8 




104 



Three Views of an Object 



Chap. 5 



5-9 



5-10 




1.00 




5-11 




5-12 



75-2 PLACES 




Problems 



105 



5-13 




5-14 



1.00 R 



1.00 DIA 



1.00 




1.00R 



5-15 




106 

5-16 



Three Views of an Object 




Chap. 5 

.50R- 3 PLACES 

.50DIA-4 PLACES 



. - -- 



5-17 




5-18 




1.00 



2.00 R 
3.00 DIA 

.50DIA 



5-19 




2.63 



Problems 



107 



5-20 




1.50DIA 






5-21 




5-22 







5-23 



Top 



108 



Three Views of an Object 



Chap. 5 



In the following, redraw the two given views and add the thud as re- 
quired. If assigned, prepare a freehand three-dimensional sketch of the 
object. Each square on the grid pattern is 0.20 per side. 



If" 



=^ + 1 




5-24 



Tpt | | | | | | | 

l== :== E= = = == 


■ 


::::::: 

— 


§§| 


"i i 


: :":■": 



5-25 



3 ± 
3 4 



i 



*i 






f 



7 



RS 



Problems 



109 



5-26 Problem created by Steve Gertz. 



r^puMLiBtjiEjit + d : ^~ 


,. r 


-^, ~ 


I | | !__, ^_ 




. — ~i_4— J _ 








, | L L.1J ' "" h _ 








? 


Z 


- 


— ~— 









5-27 



.69—" 




1.63R 



69DIA 



2.00 — 
*- 1.38-*- 



■1.00 
.25 



i; 



.50 



t 1,71 

£1 



5-28 Dimensions are in millimeters. 
— 60 - 




FRONT 20m * 



110 

5-29 



Three Views of an Object 



Chap. 5 



4PLACES-25DIA 
.38R 

1.00 




MATL 
-J- 2024-T4AL 



5-30 



2.13 




.44DIA-2 PLACES 



MATL -g- THK 



ALL INSIDE BEND RADII ^ 



DIMENSIONS 
AND TOLERANCES 



6 










e^» 




^- -^ 



s&rA&'^Z—z>.v .'. s * ' 



■v^r^ 



fj n 

> * 

f 






I 



L. MAM /*!&:& 






Figure 6-0 Illustration courtesy of Teledyne Post, Des Plaines, 
Illinois 60016. 



6-1 INTRODUCTION 



This chapter explains and illustrates dimensioning and tolerancing. 
The picture portion of a drawing defines the shape of the object; the 
dimensions define the size; and the tolerances define the amount of 
variance permitted in the size. All three pieces of information are 
needed to form a clear, understandable, manufacturable drawing. 

To help you gain an understanding of the relationships between 
size, shape, and tolerance, look at Figure 6-1. What is the height of 
the car? Is it full size or is it merely a model? We may get some ap- 
proximation of the height by comparing the height of the car with the 
height of the girl. If we use the girl for our scale, we may say that 
the car is a little less than one-half a girl height. Here the picture gives 
us shape and the girl gives us an approximate size— but what about the 
tolerance? How tall is the girl? Is she wearing high-heeled shoes or is 
she standing on a box? For a more accurate answer, we need a more 
accurate scale. 



. 




Figure 6-1 How high is the car? Photograph courtesy of General 
Motors Corp. 



112 



Sec. 6-2 Extension Lines, Dimension Lines, Leader Lines, and Arrowheads 



113 



The post beside the girl has been calibrated into 6 inches-intervals. 
Further, it has been cut off and labeled 35V6 inches. If the post is our 
scale and the 35V& inches-label is our dimension, we are assured of a 
more accurate measurement. As before, since the accuracy of our final 
measurement depends on the accuracy of our scale, we would pick a 
scale that satisfies our specific tolerance requirement. If we just want 
to know about how high the car is, the girl would be sufficient. If we 
want to know within an inch, the post dimension would probably be 
acceptable. If we want a more accurate answer, we would have to use 
a more accurate scale. 

As you read through this chapter, remember that dimensions are 
the most important part of any drawing. Always try to dimension your 
drawings clearly, concisely, and in an easily understandable manner. 



6-2 EXTENSION LINES, DIMENSION 
LINES, LEADER LINES, 
AND ARROWHEADS 

Dimensions are placed on a drawing by using a system of exten- 
sion lines, dimension lines, leader lines, and arrowheads. Figure 6-2 
illustrates how these various kinds of lines are used for dimensioning. 
The lines are defined as follows: 



EXTENSION LINES: used to indicate the extension of an edge or 

point to a location outside the part outline. * 

DIMENSION LINES: show the direction and extent of a dimension. * 

LEADER LINES: used to direct an expression, in note form, to the 

intended place on the drawing. The leader line should terminate in an 

arrowhead or dot. * 

ARROWHEADS: used to indicate the ends of dimension lines and the 

ends of some leader lines. * Arrowheads are drawn as shown in Figure 

6-3. 



Figure 6-2 Extension, dimension and leader lines. 




♦Extractec from American Drafting Standards; Line Conventions, Sectioning, 
and Lettering (ASA Y14-2-1957) with the permission of the publisher, The Ameri- 
can Society of Mechanical Engineers, 29 West 39 St., New York, N.Y. 



114 



Dimensions and Tolerances 



Chap. 6 




•°r, 



r*et 



*»o<* 




>H«o^ 




Figure 6-3 Arrowheads. 




6-3 LOCATING AND PRESENTING 
DIMENSIONS 

How do you locate and present dimensions on a drawing so that 
they may be easily and unmistakably understood? Unfortunately; there 
is no one answer to this question. Each drawing must be dimensioned 
according to its individual requirements, and what is acceptable in one 
situation may not be acceptable in another situation. Learning how to 
locate and how to present dimensions depends a great deal on drawing 
experience, but there are some general guidelines that may be followed. 
These guidelines are presented below and are illustrated in Figure 6-4. 
6-4(a). Dimension by using extension, dimension, and leader 
lines placed neatly around the various views of the ob- 
ject. Place dimensions so that your reader will have no 
difficulty understanding which surface or which edge 
you are defining. 



/ 



1,00- 



2.38 



1.75 



1.00 



-.38 



Figure 6-4(a) 



Sec. 6-3 



Locating and Presenting Dimensions 



IIS 



6-4(b). Be sure that the size of the object is completely defined 
and that no surfaces or edges are left out. 



.50 Oi A 




*o^xo* 



1* 



2.00 



1.00 



.SOW A 




Figure 6-4(b) 



6 -4(c). Always keep dimensions at one constant height. 1/8 or 
3/16 is the generally accepted height, although a larger 
height may be used in some cases (title blocks, page num- 
bers, and so on). Letters and numbers should never be 
less than 1/8 in height. 



2.00 




1.25 





Figure 6-4(c) 



116 



Dimensions and Tolerances 



Chap. 6 



6-4(d). Do not squeeze dimensions into small spaces and angles. 
Undersized dimensions are difficult to read. 




Figure 6-4(d) 



6-4(e). Unless it is absolutely necessary, do not put any dimen- 
sions within the visible lines of the object being defined. 
You will never know when or how a drawing may have to 
be changed. It is important that you realize that drawing 
changes are not necessarily the result of errors. Customer 
requirements may change, designs may be modified, a 
new machine may be added to your company's manufac- 
turing process, and so on. Any one of these reasons, and 
many more, could necessitate drawing changes. 




\S 





i 


i 




2, 


13 




1 


' 


-i 1,88— *- 







Figure 6-4(e) 



Sec. 6-3 



Locating and Presenting Dimensions 



117 



6-4(f). Do not overdimension. Too many dimensions are as con- 
fusing as too few dimensions. A common mistake is to 
double dimension, that is, to dimension the same dis- 
tance twice on the same drawing. One dimension per 
distance is sufficient. 




iS 



Figure 6-4(f ) 



6-4(g). Do not place dimensions too close to the object tp be de- 
fined. A dimension line should never be closer than 3/8 
to the object. 






Figure 6-4(g) 



118 



Dimensions and Tolerances 



Chap. 6 



6-4(h). Leader lines should all be at the same angle. This will tend 
to give the drawing a more organized appearance. 




75DIA 



.50DIA 



1.00 Dl A 




1.00 DIA 



Figure 6 -4(h) 



6-4(i). Space dimensions evenly. This not only gives the drawing 
a well-organized appearance, but it also makes the dimen- 
sions much easier to read. 




y 




Figure 6-4(i) 



Sec. 6-3 



Locating and Presenting Dimensions 



119 



6-4(j). Leader lines should not change directions until after they 
have extended beyond the outside edge of the object and 
beyond any dimension or extension lines. Leader lines 
should always end in a short horizontal section that will 
guide the reader's eye into the appropriate note. 




-88DIA 




Al 


I 








tso 


y 




i 


, 










r 


1 








—75 


-«-i-*^ 






s 


! *- 









Figure 6-4(j) 



6-4(k). Use either decimals or fractions. Do not mix the two. 
Some companies make exception to this by having criti- 
cal dimensions written in decimal form and noncritical 
dimensions written in fractional form. No such variance 
is in effect for the problems in this book. 




*S 



7 

t.38 



2.00 



.50 



Li 






.63 




Figure 6-4(k) 



120 



Dimensions and Tolerances 



Chap. 6 



6-4(1). Use either the unidirectional or aligned system. Do not 
mix the two. 




l/ 




100 



Figure 6-4(1) 

6-4(m). Unless it is absolutely necessary, do not dimension to a 
hidden line. In most cases, the addition of a section cut 
(see Chapter 13) to the drawing is probably the best way 
to eliminate excess or confusing hidden lines. 




1.00 



*■ ^ 

r— - 1 



1,00 




Figure 6-4(m) 



Sec. 6-3 



Locating and Presenting Dimensions 



121 



6-4(n). Do not include the symbol for inches (") on dimensions. 
All dimensions in mechanical drafting are in inches unless 
otherwise stated. An exception to this rule is the number 
1 which is usually written 1" so it will not make vertical 
dimensions lines appear as center lines. 




Figure 6-4(n) 



6-4(o). Always specify whether or not a hole or arc dimension is 
a diameter or a radius. Usually, holes are dimensioned in 
diameters (DIA) and arcs are dimensioned by radii (R). 





,63 



Figure 6-4(o) 



122 



Dimensions and Tolerances 



Chap. 6 




-.75 



1.00 




1.00 



6-4(p). Do not run extension or dimension lines through other 
dimension or extension lines unless there is absolutely no 
other alternative. The same is true for leader lirieti. 




.62 











t 
2.00 






z 




+ 

i.aa 










i 

i 


I l : 










5-^ 




-62 




■*■ 1.38 ■*■ 
-< 2.0< 





Figure 6-4(p) 



6-4(q). Always include overall dimensions except dtr objects that 
have rounded ends. This means the total length, width, 
and height for rectangular objects and the largest outside 
diameter and height for cylinders. 




T 

2.00 



T 

IjOO 



2.00 



1.00 



Figure 6-4(q) 



6-4(r). Always dimension holes in the views in which they ap- 
pear as circles. 




1.25 01 A 




Figure 6-4(r) 



Sec. 6-5 



Dimensioning Holes 



123 



64 UNIDIRECTIONAL AND 
ALIGNED SYSTEMS 

Dimensions may be positioned on a drawing by using either the 
unidirectional or the aligned system. The unidirectional system is the 
preferred system. In the unidirectional system, all dimensions are 
placed so that they may be read from the bottom of the drawing, that 
is, with their guidelines horizontal. In the aligned system, dimensions 
are placed so that they may be read from either the bottom or the 
right side of the drawing, that is, with their guidelines parallel to the 
surface that they are defining. Figure 6-5 illustrates the difference 
between the two systems. 

The unidirectional system is the newer of the two systems and it 
has become the most popular because it is easier to draw and to read. 
All problems in this book are dimensioned by using the unidirectional 
system. 



Unidirectional 




Aligned 




Figure 6-5 A comparison between the unidirectional and aliened 
dimensioning system. 



6-5 DIMENSIONING HOLES 

Figure 6-6 illustrates several different ways to dimension holes. 
Holes are usually dimensioned to their diameters because most drills, 
punches, and boring machines are set up in terms of diameters. Arcs 
are usually dimensioned according to their radii. 

Always locate a hole by dimensioning to its center point. Make 
sure that the center point of the hole is clearly defined by crossing 
the short sections of center lines. The long sections of the center lines 
may be dimensioned as if they were extension lines. 

When you use leader lines, always point the arrow end of the 
line at the center point of the hole. Always finish the non-arrow end 







Figure 6-6 Different ways to dimension holes and arcs. 

with a short horizontal section that will guide the reader's eye into the 
dimension note. Always place dimension notes so that they may be 
read from the bottom of the drawing. 



6-6 DIMENSIONING ANGLES 
AND HOLES 

Figure 6-7 illustrates several different ways to dimension angles. 
It also illustrates the angular (dimensioned with angles) and the coordi- 
nate (dimensioned using the center lines as base lines) systems of 
dimensioning holes on an object. 



Figure 6-7 Examples of angle and hole dimensioning. 




124 



Sec. 6-8 



Base Line System 



125 



6-7 DIMENSIONING SMALL DISTANCES 
AND SMALL ANGLES 

When you dimension a small distance or a small angle, always 
keep the lettering at the normal height of either 1/8 or 3/16. The 
temptation is to squeeze the dimensions into the smaller space. This 
is unacceptable because crowded or cramped dimensions are difficult 
to read, especially on blueprints which are microfilmed. Figure 6-8 
shows several different ways to dimension small distances or angles 
and still keep the dimensions at the normal height. 




25 u 





1 



r 



3.00 



H h-,25 



_L 



.64 



-.36 




H*h 



Figure 6-8 Different ways to dimension small distances and 
angles. 



6-8 BASE LINE SYSTEM 

The base line system of dimensioning is illustrated in Figure 6-9. 
All dimensions in the same plane are located from the same line which 
is called a base line. (It is sometimes called a reference line or a datum 
line.) This system is particularly useful because it eliminates tolerance 



Figure 6-9 Baseline system. 



Baselines 




1.13 Dl A 



126 



Dimensions and Tolerances 



Chap. 6 



buildup, it is easy for manufacturers and inspectors to follow, and it 
is easily adaptable to the requirements of numerical tape machines. 
Its chief disadvantage is that the amount of space used on the drawing 
paper is larger— usually at least twice the area of the surface being de- 
fined. Also, once it is set up, it is difficult to alter. 

When you use the base line system, be careful to include all needed 
dimensions and be sure to use a large enough piece of paper. 



6-9 HOLE-TO-HOLE SYSTEM 

The hole-to-hole system is illustrated in Figure 6-10. It is a modi- 
fication of the base line system (Section 6-8) which is used to dimen- 
sion parts whose hole-to-hole distances are critical, for example, a part 
that must align with the shafts or dowels of another part for proper 
assembly. 

In the hole-to-hole system, all dimensions in the same plane are 
measured for the lines that define the critical holes. The base line is 
not, in this case, a physical line, but it is the center line between the 
critical holes. 



38DIA-4 PLACES 

-50R -4 PLACES 




Figure 6-10 Hole-to-hole system. 



6-10 COORDINATE SYSTEM 

The coordinate system is a dimensioning system based on the 
mathematical x-y coordinate system. It is usually only used to dimen- 
sion an object that contains a great many holes, for example, an electrical 
chassis. It is particularly well-suited to computer use and numerically 
controlled tape machines. 

Each hole on the given surface is located relative to an x-y coordi- 
nate system and then all values are listed in a chart. The overall dimen- 
sions are not included in the chart but are located on the picture part 
of the drawing. Figure 6-11 is an example of an object dimensioned by 
using the coordinate system. 



6-11 TABULAR DIMENSIONS 

Often manufacturers will produce a part in several different sizes. 
Each part will have the same basic shape, but the part will vary in over- 



Sec. 6-11 



Tabular Dimensions 



127 



3jOO 




HOLE 


X 


Y 


DIA 


A1 


0,50 


0.50 


.470 


A2 


1.50 


0.50 


.470 


A3 


2.50 


0.50 


470 


B1 


0.88 


1.62 


.375 


B2 


2.00 


1.38 


375 


C 


0.38 


2.62 


.250 


D 


2.25 


2.25 


.625 



Figure 6-11 Coordinate system. 



all size. To save having to dimension each part individually, a system 
called tabular dimensioning is used. Figure 6-12 illustrates an example 
of tabular dimensioning. 

To read tabular dimensions, look up the part number in the table 
and substitute the given numerical values for the appropriate letters in 
the figure. For example, part number 1003, according to the table, has 
an A value of 2.25, a B value of 1.50, and so on. Part number 1005 
has an A value of 2.50, a R value of 1.75, and so on. The numerical 
dimensions of .50 mean that these dimensions do not vary, that they 
remain the same for all parts. 

The table may also be used in reverse. If you know what your 
given design requirements are, look up these values in the table to find 
which part number you should call out on the drawing. 



f 


.50 


— A *- 


' .50 


*\ 


^ 




+ 1 


J 



_1 



PART NO 


A 


B 


C 





E 


1001 


2.00 


1.38 


58 


.50 


1,00 


1002 


2,00 


1.38 


.50 


.68 


1.13 


1003 


2.25 


1.50 


.68 


.75 


1.13 


1004 


2.25 


1.50 


.ao 


.75 


1.25 


1005 


2.38 


1.75 


.68 


.75 


1.25 



C DIA 



Figure 6-12 Tabular dimensions. 



Sec. 6-11 



Tabular Dimensions 



127 



3jOO 




HOLE 


X 


Y 


DIA 


A1 


0.50 


0.50 


.470 


A2 


1.50 


050 


.470 


A3 


2.50 


0.50 


.470 


B1 


0.88 


1.62 


.375 


B2 


2j00 


1.38 


375 


C 


0.38 


2.62 


.250 


D 


2.25 


2.25 


.625 



Figure 6-11 Coordinate system. 



all size. To save having to dimension each part individually, a system 
called tabular dimensioning is used. Figure 6-12 illustrates an example 
of tabular dimensioning. 

To read tabular dimensions, look up the part number in the table 
and substitute the given numerical values for the appropriate letters in 
the figure. For example, part number 1003, according to the table, has 
an A value of 2.25, a B value of 1.50, and so on. Part number 1005 
has an A value of 2.50, a B value of 1.75, and so on. The numerical 
dimensions of .50 mean that these dimensions do not vary, that they 
remain the same for all parts. 

The table may also be used in reverse. If you know what your 
given design requirements are, look up these values in the table to find 
which part number you should call out on the drawing. 




PART MO 


A 


B 


C 


D 


E 


1001 


2.00 


138 


.66 


.50 


1.00 


1002 


2.00 


1.38 


.50 


.68 


1.13 


1 003 


2.25 


1.50 


.68 


.75 


1.13 


1004 


2.25 


1.50 


50 


.75 


1.25 


1005 


2.38 


1-75 


.68 


.75 


1.25 



C DIA 



Figure 6-12 Tabular dimensions. 



128 



Dimensions and Tolerances 



Chap^6 



6-12 IRREGULARLY SHAPED CURVES 

To dimension an irregularly shaped curve, dimension the points 
that define the line. The more points you dimension, the more accurate 
will be your definition. Figure 6-13 illustrates a dimensioned irregularly 
shaped curve. 



2.00 




Figure 6-13 Dimensioning an irregular 
curve. 




Figure 6-14 Some common dimensioning 
errors. 



.25DIA 




Figure 6-15 The errors illustrated in 
Figure 6-14 corrected. 



COMMON DIMENSIONING ERRORS 



Figure 6-14 demonstrates some of the most common dimensioning 
errors. Note how cluttered and confined the dimensions appear. Com- 
pare Figure 6-14 with Figure 6-15. Both drawings are of the same 
shape, but Figure 6-15 is dimensioned properly. 

Study the errors in Figure 6-14 and then see how they were cor- 
rected in Figure 6-15. The errors are: 

(a). No arrowhead 

(b). Dimension line too thick 

(c). No gap between object and extension line 

(d). Dimension value placed over a center line 

(e). No gap between dimension line and dimension value 

(f). Arrowhead extends beyond extension line 

(g). Leader line changes direction within the object 

(h). Dimension value written too close to the object and over a 

dimension line 
(i). Fraction used while all other dimensions are in decimal form 
(j). Extension line too long 
(k). Dimension not written horizontally. 



6-14 TOLERANCES 

No dimension can be made perfectly. Unless you are very lucky, 
there will always be some variance. If, for example, you call for a di- 
mension to be made 5 inches long, you will not get exactly 5 inches on 
the finished part. It may measure 5.0001 or 4.99999, etc., but it will 
not be exactly 5 inches. 

It is not only impossible to manufacture perfect dimensions, it is 
also unnecessary. It is possible for a carpenter to build a house within 
the nearest 0.01 inches, but it isn't necessary for the structural sound- 



Sec. 6-15 



Cumulative Tolerances 



129 



ness of the house. Think of how much time such a constraint would 
add to the normal time required to build a house, and then think of 
how this extra time would needlessly affect the building cost of the 
house. 

Because it is impossible to manufacture perfect dimensions, all 
dimensions must be toleranced. Each dimension must be considered 
separately in regard to how much variance is acceptable to insure a 
satisfactory finished product. The final judgment must be made by 
considering, among other things, manufacturing capabilities, customer 
requirements, usage requirements, material properties, and cost con- 
straints. It takes experience and practice to make such a judgment cor- 
rectly. 

Many companies have "standard" tolerances. That is, their shops 
will always work to a given standard tolerance unless they are specifical- 
ly told to do otherwise. The standard tolerance is usually printed on the 
drawing as part of the company's title block. 

Figure 6-16 is a sample of standard tolerance. The notation x.xx ± 
0.01 means that any dimension that has two decimal places must be 
manufactured within 0.01 of the stated value. For example, a dimen- 
sion of 2.04 may be manufactured as small as 2.03 or as large as 2.05 
and still be an acceptable part. The other notations in the block are 
interpreted in a similar manner. 



Tolerances — Unless 


Otherw 


ise 


Specified are: 


Two Place 


Deci 


mals 




(.XX) ± 


.010 


Three Place 


> Decimals 




(.XXX) ± 


.003 


Angular ±1° 













Figure 6-16 A standard tolerance notation. 



Figure 6-17 illustrates several different ways that a tolerance may 
be specified on a drawing. Each notation is a different way of telling 
the builder the limits that he must work within. 

There are many different kinds of tolerances; each one has its own 
notations and symbols. For example, surface tolerances y/ ', roundness 
tolerances O, squareness tolerances 1, and so on. To cover them all is 
beyond the scope of this book because each represents a very specialized 
field of study. 



6-15 CUMULATIVE TOLERANCES 

Cumulative tolerances are errors that occur when several small, 
seemingly insignificant errors are compounded. Usually, they are the 
result of improper dimensioning, For example, consider Figure 6-18(a), 
and assume that the object is being manufactured to a standard compa- 



,500 ±.001 oi A 




30°±2° 



2.01 



Figure 6-17 Different ways to specify 
tolerances on a drawing. 



130 



Dimensions and Tolerances 



Chap. 6 



(b) 



-4) — <fe — ©- 



«— 1.00 -H 

* 2.00 



4.00 



m 




-i 



©— <JH 



too 




(c) 



-© © 0- 



[- — 1.00 ■*• 



3.00 



4O0 — 
4.00 — 



<+— 1.00 -*■ 



1.00 



(d) 



r-<— 1.00 
Figure 6-18 Cumulative tolerances. 



4.00 
REF 



-4) — & — ©- 



•1J0O-* 



1.00 



-*- 1.00- 



ny tolerance of ±0.02 for all two-placed dimensions. Each of the 1.00 
dimensions could be made 1.02 giving an overall length of 4.08. 

1.02 
1.02 
1.02 
1.02 
4.08 

4 08 is not an acceptable overall length, since the overall length must 
be according to the given dimension, 4.00 ± 0.02. This means that the 
greatest acceptable length is 4.02. The 4.08 object would not pass 
inspection. Unfortunately, the responsibility for this error must be 
placed directly on the draftsman who improperly dimensioned the ob- 

There are several other ways to avoid the error in Figure 6-18(a). 
In Figure 6-18(b), a REF note (reference note) was placed on the 4.00 
dimension The REF notation means that the dimension is not critical 
to the manufacturing of the object and has only been included for the 
reader's convenience. Be very careful when you use the REF notation 
that it is only used for insignificant dimensions. 

In Figure 6-18(c) one of the 1.00 dimensions was dropped, inis 
means that the end section of the object, which is now not dimen- 



Problems 



131 



sioned, may vary. All the other dimensions are still manufactured 
within stated tolerances. In Figure 6-1 8(d) the base line system of 
dimensioning was used. In most cases, the base line system is the best 
way to avoid cumulative tolerances because no one dimension is de- 
pendent on the accuracy of another dimension. Each dimension is 
manufactured separately. 



PROBLEMS 



Redraw and dimension the following shapes and objects. Each square 
on the grid pattern is Va per side. 



6-1 



i 



6-2 







6-3 



6-4 





6-5 



! 

-— — , — „ — . , , i 

-ULLI I 1 I I I I I I I 1 M I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I I - 



132 

6-6 



Dimensions and Tolerances 



Chap. 6 









I 






I 






















I 


















I 












: 




















































































































































































































































































— 























































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































Redraw and dimension the following shapes. Each square on the grid 
pattern is .20 per side. 

6-7 



























1 









































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































- 


— 














- 















































































































































































































6-8 









































1 



































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































6-9 

' XX -1- I f 1 I 1 1 I 


~ x x - 4- I- — ' 


^ i 


/"' ™2 t £ 


f~ r - \ 


z Z \ ^ 


.A -A \c ^ 


L. L- 5 


J — — — — L 




— ' 




_. — ■ 


------ 






- " ~ ~ - 




~ : . . 



Problems 



133 



6-10 









































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































_ 











































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































6-11 




6-12 




6-13 



£ 



v- 



:: 



xrtrr 



!s; 



=N 



:t 






I 



6-14 




6-15 






§; 



r---s 



$=:* 



EE 



134 



Dimensions and Tolerances 



Chap. 6 



6-16 



6-17 




vt 



& 



m 



; 



SEAtl 



6-18 Dimension the following chassis surface twice; once using the 
base line system and once using the coordinate system. 



:: 



a 



e=:s 



S==2 



<> 



^ 



® 



Draw three views of the following objects and dimensions. Use both the 
decimal and the unidirectional system. Each triangle or square on the 
grid pattern is .20 per side. 

6-19 




Problems 



135 



6-20 



6-21 




6-22 




6-24 









i _^_„__ r :: 


^> ^ 






— . _ 


— ^^ 





K.y 








r ^„ \ UdZ 


L V^ ±.U 






-. 




- 



6-23 -j- 








„_ m. — 1 














-£^ 


^ 


<^ 


" 








































































b i 





136 



Dimensions and Tolerances 



Chap. 6 



6-25 What is the maximum and minimum height that the following 
five pieces could generate if their dimensions and tolerances are 
as follows: 



(a) 1.38 ± 0.06 

(b, 0.63 ♦_ 0-00 

, v ! Kn + 0.02 

(c) 1.50 _ 00 

(d) 1.000 ± 0.004 

(e) 1-3/8 ± 1/32 



Max 

? ? 

Min 




6-26 In the following problem, all linear dimensions have a tolerance 
of ± 0.03 and all angular dimensions have a tolerance of ± 1°. If 
the disc piece is placed within the 90° -opening of the larger base 
piece, what is the maximum height that the two pieces together 
could generate? Prepare a layout to verify your answer. 




Problems 



137 



6-27 Redraw the following object and insert the following dimensions: 

„ _ 9 7 = + 0.01 

a -z.it) _ 0Q2 

b = 1.88 ± 0.01 
c = 1.130 ± 0.002 
d = 2.38 ± 0.01 

« = 2 000 + ° 003 
e z.uuu _ Q 0Q2 

f - 1 q«p + o.oo 

f - 1.38iH _ Q Q1 

i? = 2 00 + ° 05 
* z,uu - 0.00 

ft = 30° ± 5° 

i = 0.750 ± 0.001 

j = 1.25 ± 0.03 

6-28 Dimension the following object by using the tabular system. For 
part number 

1001: V 1 = 3.00, V 9 = 1.80, V, = 2.00, V A = .80 

1002: V 1 = 3.20, V, = 1.90, Fg = 2.00, V 4 = .80 

1003: V x = 4.00, V^ = 2.20, V> = 2.20, V 4 = .80 

1004: V a = 4.00, V 2 = 2.20, Vg = 2.40, V 4 = 1.00 




v 4 



t)r 



/ 



^ 



n\ 



K: 



:=* 



- 



j 



t 



n 



~-i 



-,t 



£ 



k 



F 



31 



Each square on the grid pattern is 0.20 per side. 



OBLIQUE SURFACES 

AND EDGES 



7 




Figure 7-0 Photograph courtesy of General Motors Corp. 



7-1 INTRODUCTION 



Oblique surfaces and edges are made up of planes and lines that are 
not parallel to either principal plane line. Figure 7-1 is an example of an 
oblique surface. Note that none of the lines that define the surface is 
parallel to either principal plane line and that each line is a different 
length in each given orthographic view. Note also that the shape of the 
plane also varies in each orthographic view. This variance makes it 
difficult to visualize what oblique surfaces really look like (what is 
their true shape) and will force you to rely on projection theory to 
help you to formulate accurate finished drawings. 

This chapter explains and illustrates the kinds of oblique surfaces 
most often found in drawings. 



7-2 COMPOUND EDGES AND LINES 

Figure 7-2 is a problem that involves a compound edge. The prob- 
lem is to draw the top view, given the front and right side views. Figure 
7-3 is the solution and was derived by the following procedure: 




Figure 7-1 An oblique surface. 



GIVEN: Front and side views. 
PROBLEM: Draw the top view. 





Figure 7-2 



139 



140 



Oblique Surfaces and Edges 



Chap. 7 



SOLUTION: 



1. Make, to the best of your ability, a freehand sketch of the solu- 
tion and, if possible, an isometric sketch of the entire object. 




Figure 7 -8(a) 

2. Analyze the given information and label those points about 
which you are unsure. In this example surfaces 1-2-3-4 and 
3-4-5-6 were labeled. 



4.5 



1.4. 



3.6 



2.3 



Figure 7 -3(b) 



Sec. 7-2 



Compound Edges and Lines 



141 



3. Project points 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 into the top view by using the 
projection theory presented in Chapter 4. 




Figure 7 -3(c) 



4. Using very light construction lines, lay out the top view of sur- 
faces 1-2-3-4 and 3-4-5-6. Also lightly lay out the remainder 
of the object. 




Figure 7-3(d) 



142 



Oblique Surfaces and Edges 



Chap. 7 



5. Erase all excess lines and darken in all the lines to their final 
color and configuration. 





Figure 7-3(e) 



GIVEN: An object. 

PROBLEM: Draw a front, top, and side 

views. 




Figure 7-4 



SOLUTION: 



In this example line 3-4 is a compound edge. It was formed by the 
intersection of two inclined surfaces; yet line 3-4 is not parallel to 
either principal plane line. 

Figure 7-4 is another problem that involves a compound edge. In 
this problem the object is pictured (an isometric drawing is presented) 
and you are asked to draw all three orthographic views: front, top, and 
right side. Figure 7-5 is the solution and was derived by the following 
procedure: 

1. Make, to the best of your ability, a sketch of the solution. 
-Make the sketches as complete and as accurate as you can. It is 
much easier to change sketches than to change drawings. 



Figure 7-5(a) 




Sec. 7-2 



Compound Edges and Lines 



143 



Working from your sketches, lightly lay out the solution. If 
necessary, label any confusing areas and use projection theory 
to work known pieces of information together to formulate 
the final solution. Alsoi use projection theory to check any 
areas about which you are unsure. 




Figure 7-5(b) 



3. When the layout is complete, erase all excess lines and draw in 
all lines to their final color and configuration. 



\ 


4^ 4> 




-•I.I 



Figure 7-5(c) 



144 



Oblique Surfaces and Edges 



Chap, 7 



7-3 OBLIQUE SURFACES 

Figure 7-6 is a problem that involves an oblique surface. An 
oblique surface is one that is not parallel to either principal plane line 
(see Figure 6-1). The problem is to draw the front view given the top 



GIVEN: Top and side views. 
PROBLEMS: Draw front view 




Figure 7-6 

and right side views. Figure 7-7 is the solution and was derived by the 
following procedure: 

1. Make, to the best of your ability, a freehand sketch of the solu- 
tion and, if possible, an isometric sketch of the entire object. 



SOLUTION: 




Sec. 7-3 



Oblique Cuts 



145 



2. Analyze the given information and label those points, lines, or 
planes about which you are unsure. In this example surface 
1-2-3-4 was labeled. 




Figure 7-7<b) 



3. Project points 1, 2, 3, and 4 into the front view by using pro- 
jection theory. 




Figure 7-7(c) 



146 



Oblique Surfaces and Edges 



Chap. 7 



4. Using very light layout lines, lay out the front view of surface 
1-2-3-4. Also lay out the remainder of the object. 




Figure 7 -7(d) 



5. Erase all excess lines and draw in all lines to their final color 
and configuration. 






Figure 7 -7(e) 



Surface 1-2-3-4 in Figure 7-7 is an oblique surface. It is not paral- 
lel to either of the principal plane lines. Because it is not parallel to 
either principal plane line, none of the three final views represents a 
true picture of the shape of surface 1-2-3-4. How to find the true 
shape of an oblique surface is explained in Section 11-6. 



Sec. 7-4 



Parallel Edges 



147 



Figure 7-8 is another example of a problem involving an oblique 
surface. 





Scale ^-=1 
4 




GIVEN: An object. 

PROBLEM: Draw front, top, and side 



views. 



Figure 7-8 Three views of an object which contains oblique sur- 
faces. 



7-4 PARALLEL EDGES 

Figure 7-9 is an example of a problem that involves parallel edges. 
Parallel edges are edges that are parallel to each other and may or may 
not be parallel to the principal plane lines. The problem is to draw the 
front, top, and right side view when an isometric drawing is given. 
Figure 7-10 is the solution and was derived by using the same proce- 
dure outlined for Figure 7-6. 




SOLUTION: 



Figure 7-10(a) 



Figure 7-9 




148 



Oblique Surfaces and Edges 



Chap. 7 




Figure 7 -10(b) 




X 







Figure 7-10(c) 



In this problem surface 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8 is an oblique flat surface 
that cuts across the object. The' object was (before it was cut by sur- 
face 1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8) shaped l&e a backward C and it is important to 
realize that the object is still basically shaped like a backward C. (Note 
the left side view.) The fact that the object contains an oblique surface 
that cuts through several other surfaces need not complicate the draw- 
ing of orthographic views. Look back at Section 7-3 which illustrated 
and explained how to draw oblique surfaces and compare the solution 
to Figure 7-6 with the solution to Figure 7-9. With the exception of 
the horizontal slot in Figure 7-9, the problems are the same. 

Figure 7-11 is another example of a problem that involves parallel 
edges. 



Sec. 7-5 



Dihedral Angles 



149 




Scale; ^ = 1 
4 




J=J 



Figure 7-11 Three views of an object which contains several sets 
of parallel edges. 



7-5 DIHEDRAL ANGLES 



Figure 7-12 is a problem that involves a dihedral angle. A dihedral 
angle is an angle between two planes. The problem is to draw the front 
view of the object when the top and right side views are given. Figure 
7-13 is the solution and was derived by the procedure on the following 
page: 

GIVEN: Top and side views. 
PROBLEM: Draw front view. 





Figure 7-12 



150 



Oblique Surfaces and Edges 



Chap. 7 



SOLUTION: 

1. Make, to the best of your ability, a freehand sketch of the solu- 
tion and, if possible, a sketch of the entire object. 




Figure 7 -13(a) 



2. Define the vortex line of the dihedral angle. In this example the 
vortex line is defined as line 1-2. 



4 2 5 

m 



3 I 




Figure 7-1 3(b) 



Sec. 7-5 



Dihedral Angles 



151 



3. Define the surfaces that make up the dihedral angle. In this 
problem the surfaces are 3-4-1-2 and 1-2-5-6. 



4 2 s 



¥■ 



4,5 



Figure 7-1 3(c) 



4. Project points 1,2,3,4,5, and 6 into the front view by using 
projection theory. 







4 


: 


Z 5 










/ 






\ 








3 




1 






6 






3 


4 




5 


6 






3,6 


4£ 








\ 


/ 












> 










1 









































Figure 7 -13(d) 



152 



Oblique Surfaces and Edges 



Chap. 7 



5. Using very light lines, lay out the front view of surfaces 3-4-1-2 
and 1-2-5-6. After checking your work, complete the initial 
layout of the entire object. 





Figure 7-1 3(e) 



6. Erase all excess lines and darken in all lines to their final color 
and configuration. 

Figure 7-14 is another example of a problem that involves a di- 
hedral angle. 





Scale: 3 =1 




Figure 7-14 Three views of an object which contains several dia- 
hedral angles. 



Sec. 7-6 Holes In Oblique Surfaces 153 

7-6 HOLES IN OBLIQUE SURFACES 

Figure 7-15 is a problem that involves a hole in an oblique surface. 
The problem is to draw the top view of the object when the front and 
right side views are given. Figure 7-16 is the solution and was derived 
by the following procedure: 



GIVEN: Front and side views. 
PROBLEM: Draw top view. 





SOLUTION: 

1. Make, to the best of your ability, a sketch of the solution and, 
if possible, the entire object. 



Figure 7-16(a) 




154 



Oblique Surfaces and Edges 



Chap. 7 



2. Using very light lines, draw the top view (not including the 
hole) by using the procedure outlined for oblique surfaces in 
Section 7-3. 







4 


-7 


3 












1 


' 


2 






/ ** 






1 


v 4 


T T"V 




1 






4 








-^ 


K- 
















3 




V 


y 










2 \ 


2 






3 



Figure 7 -16(b) 



3. In the right side view, where the hole appears as a circle, mark 
off and label points 5 through 16 at 30° -intervals around the 
circle. Although these points do not really exist on the circle, 
they are to be used for reference. 





1 






4 




rJiU 






^/\L/\to 












\ ^-"Tv^ /11 






16V7 


\7l2 






1b 14 


-13 




2 






3 



Figure 7 -16(c) 



Sec. 7-6 



Holes In Oblique Surfaces 



155 



Project points 5 through 16 from the right side view into the 
front view as shown in Figure 7-16. Label the points. Be care- 
ful not to reverse the points when you project between views. 
For example, points 16 and 12 are on the same horizontal 
projection line, but point 16 is to the left of center and point 
12 is to the right of center. 




Figure 7-1 6(d) 

5. Using the information from the front and right side views, 
project points 5 through 16 into the top view. Check each 
point carefully. 







Figure 7 -16(e) 



1S6 



Oblique Surfaces and Edges 



Chap. 7 



6. Erase all excess lines and darken in all lines to their final color 
and configuration. 




GIVEN: An object. 

PROBLEM: Draw front, top, and side 

views. 





Figure 7-16(f) 




Figure 7-17 



The use of 30° -intervals in step 3 was made simply because it is 
easy to draw 30°-angles with a T-square and a 30-60-90 triangle as a 
guide. Any angle could have been used, including randomly spaced 
angles. The more points used, the more accurate will be the projected 
ellipse. 

But what if we must work from an isometric drawing? Figure 7-17 
shows an isometric drawing of the object used for Figure 7-15, but this 
time we know less about the shape of the hole because we are given 
much less information to work with. Nevertheless, we can draw three 
views -of the object, including the hole. Figure 7-18 is the drawing 
sequence used to convert the isometric drawing given in Figure 7-17 to 
three orthographic views. The following procedure was used: 

SOLUTION: 

1. Draw the front, top, and side views of the object from the 
given information. You will not be able to include the hole. 





Sec. 7-6 



Holes In Oblique Surfaces 



157 



2. Since we know that the hole will be drilled in a horizontal 
direction and that it will be centered in the object, we can 
draw it as a circle in the right side view. 




Figure,7-18(b) 



3. Using a T-square and 30-60-90 triangle, mark off lines, 
30° apart, in the right side view as shown. Label the lines. 






Figure 7-18(c) 



158 



Oblique Surfaces and Edges 



Chap. 7 



4. Project lines A-I, L-K, and J-B into the front view by pro- 
jecting points A, L, and J from line 4-1 in the side view to 
line 4_i in the front view and points I, K, and B from line 
3-2 in the side to line 3-2 in the front view. Note that lines 
A-I, L-K, and J-B cannot be projected into the top view and 
that lines C-D, E-F, and C-H cannot be projected into the 
front view. 




Figure 7 -18(d) 



5. Project points A, L, J, I, K, and B from the front view to the 
top view as shown. 




Figure 7 -18(e) 



Sec. 7-6 



Holes In Oblique Surfaces 



159 



6. Project points C, E, G, H, F, and D from the top view into the 
front view as shown. 




Figure 7-18(f) 



7. Draw in lines A-B, C-D, E-F, G-H, I-J, and L-K in the front 
and top views. 




1 H F D2 1 H F D2 



Figure 7-18(g) 



160 



Oblique Surfaces and Edges 



Chap. 7 



8. In the side view, label the intersections that the 30°-lines 
make with the side view of the hole. 



3 1KB ? 




4 A L J 1 



4CEG3 




1HFD2 



C £ G 3 







r / T4 


K Jn " 



H F D 



Figure 7 -18(h) 



9. Project points 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, and 16 into the 
front view and points 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 16, 5, 6, and 7 
into the top view. Note that points 5 and 11 cannot be pro- 
jected into the front view and that points 8 and 14 cannot be 
projected into the top view. 




Figure 7-1 8(i) 



Sec. 7-6 



Holes In Oblique Surfaces 



161 



10. Project points 8 and 14 from the front view to the top view 
and project points 5 and 11 from the top view to the front 
view. 




Figure 7-18(j) 



11. The hole is now defined in each view. Erase all excess lines 
and darken in the final lines (including the hole) to their prop- 
er color and configuration. 









Figure 7-18(k) 



162 



Oblique Surfaces and Edges 



Chap. 7 



7-7 INTERNAL SURFACES IN 
OBLIQUE SURFACES 

Figure 7-19 is a problem that involves an internal surface in an 
oblique surface. This kind of problem is very similar to problems that 
involve holes in oblique surfaces. The problem here is to draw the front 
view of the object when the top and right side views are given. Figure 
7-20 is the solution and was derived by the listed procedure: 



GIVEN: Top and side views. 
PROBLEM: Draw front view. 






Figure 7-19 



SOLUTION: 



1. Draw a front view of the object. Include the oblique surface 
and omit the internal surfaces. Use the outline presented in 
Section 7-3. 



Figure 7 -20(a) 




Sec. 7-7 



Internal Surfaces In Oblique Surfaces 



163 




3. 2 



4 1 



o 



Figure 7-20(b) 



2. .Number the points of the internal surfaces in the given views. 
In this example the six corners of the hexagon cutout were 
labeled points 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10. 



3 2 




4 1 





3 



Figure 7 -20(c) 



164 



Oblique Surfaces and Edges 



Chap. 7 



3- Using projection theory, project points 5 through 10 into 
the front view. 




Figure 7-20(d ) 

4. Erase all excess lines and darken in all lines to their final color 
and configuration. 






Figure 7 -20(e) 



When you work on a problem that involves internal surfaces, it is 
important that you carefully label the intersection of the internal sur- 
faces with the outer surfaces. If necessary, add imaginary points (as 
was dpne for holes in internal surfaces) to help insure an accurate pro- 
jection of the shape of the intersection. 



Problems 
PROBLEMS 

Draw three views (front, top, and side) of the following objects: 
7-1 



WS 



7-3 



1.13 



3.13 



2.38 




7-2 



HEXAGON 
1.75 ACBOSS FLATS 




-50X.50 SQUARE HOLE 
Perpendicular to 
inclined surface 




LSG 



166 



Oblique Surfaces and Edges 



Chap. 7 



7-5 



2 LARGE HOLE3-.75DIA 
1 SMALL HOLE -.50 DIA 



.75 




20 R 



Millemetera 



For each of the following problems, redraw the given two views and 
add the appropriate view so that each object is defined by a front, top, 
and side view. Each square of the grid pattern is 0.20 on each side. 



7-7 




;94R 



30*\ 



2.36 



i\ 



■60° 



Problems 



167 



7-8 



===5^=2==== 


::: :-::::::_s-:=:::::=:::::-: 
—j-r 1— : s ~j - 



7-9 



45 






■ 




1 

2. 


00 

1 


\V 


| 


,o0 


J 




t 


-* 2.00 *i 



,31^- t.38-H 



-.50 






A. 



45 <L- 



-* 2.00- 



.25 



1 



7-10 



I 



7 



7-11 



4V 



1.75 
.25- 



"ZEL 



Z 



f 



ao°— Ay/ U- 1 



63 



r 



25 



1-38 



—.33 




1.08 



7-12 









































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































s 










/ 
































































\ 






/ 




































































s 


/ 











































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































168 



Oblique Surfaces and Edges 



Chap. 7 



7-13 



7-14 This problem is based on information supplied courtesy of Wendt- 
Sonis/Unimet Division of TRW, Inc. 




2.00 




7-15 







































































































































































































































































































































































































































*J 




































































».. 


















i 










\ 


































■-J 


-s 






















\ 
























































1 










\ 










































' 












i 


f 










1 


v 






































/ 




























\ 




































/ 
















t 














\ 


































/ 
















/ 














\ 






















































































































































































































































































































- 





























,94 R 




7-16 




Problems 

7-17 Problem courtesy of Mr. Tony Lazaris, 



169 




2.sa 



4.00 




.38— H h— — M U— .38 



CYLINDERS 



8 




Figure 8-0 Photograph courtesy of Detroit Diesel Allison, Divi- 
sion of General Motors Corp. 



8-1 INTRODUCTION 

Cylinder problems are problems whose basic geometric shape is a 
cylinder. They are often difficult to visualize and draw because they have 
no natural flat surfaces, making it confusing to know where to start. Fig- 
ure 8-1 demonstrates this point by showing front, top, and right side 
views of a natural, uncut cylinder. The front and top views are identical 
and regardless of how the cylinder is rotated about the center point, x, 
the front and top views remain identical. How can we label or reference 
cylinders to make sure that those who read the finished drawings clear- 
ly understand which view is the front and which is the top? 

The key to solving the problems is in using the center lines. The 
right side view of Figure 8-1 defines vertical and horizontal center 
lines which divide the cylinder into four equal quadrants. Where the 
horizontal and vertical center lines cross the periphery of the cylinder 
is defined as center line edge points, and are marked points 1, 2, 3, 4, 
5, 6, 7, and 8. They are all double points and represent the end views 
of longitudinal center lines which can be seen in the front and top 
views. These longitudinal center lines 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, and 7-8 can be 
used to define the cylinder's height and width and can be used as the- 
oretical base lines from which to reference variances from the basic 
cylindrical shape (cuts, chamfers, and so on). 

It should be understood that although longitudinal center lines 
do not physically exist on cylindrical pieces, they represent where the 
curved surface of the cylinder changes direction (see Section 5-5). 

Center lines will be used throughout this chapter, as they are in 
industry, to define and give reference to cylinder problems. The first 
step in any cylinder problem should be to define the center lines. 















5 

3 




6 
4 














1 




2 





Figure 8-1 Three views of a cylinder. 



171 



172 Cylinders 

8-2 CUTS ABOVE THE CENTER LINE 



Chap. 8 



Figure 8-2 is an example of a cylinder cut lengthwise above the 
center line. The problem is to find the top view when the front and 
right side views are given. Figure 8-3 is the solution and was derived 
by the following procedure: 



GIVEN: Front and side views. 
PROBLEM: Draw top view. 





Figure 8-2 Cylinder cut above the centerline. 

SOLUTION: 

1. Define the horizontal center line edge points— 5, 6, 7, and 8— in 
the front and right side views. 



3.4 



7a 



12 



S6 




Figure 8-3(a) 



Sec. 8-2 



Cuts Above the Center Line 



173 



2. Project points 5, 6, 7, and 8 into the top view; then, using 
construction lines, connect the points to form a rectangle. 

3. Define the cut surface 1, 2, 3, and 4 in the front and right side 
views. 



7 




6 








y 














3 2 












4 1 
















1/ 


? 




8 




5 


/ 






3.4 12 


5,6 


5S/ 


14 


23 




79 








\67 








\ 


_ 













Figure 8-3(b) 



4. Project points 1, 2, 3, and 4 into the top view and, using con- 
struction lines, connect the points to form a rectangle. 

5. Darken in the two rectangles with object lines. 




Figure 8-3(c) 



Although a technical solution to the problem has been derived, 
there still may be some difficulty in visualizing what it means. The cut 
surface 1-2-3-4 which appears as a rectangle in the top view, appears as 
a straight line in both the front and right side views. The surfaces 8-5- 
1-4 and 3-2-6-7 appear in the top view to be similar to the flat surface 



174 



Cylinders 



Chap. 8 



l_2-3-4, but they are not. Surfaces 8-5-1-4 and 3-2-6-7 are curved 
surfaces that start at horizontal center lines 5-8 and 7-6 and extend up- 
ward to lines 4-1 and 7-6. Study the right side view to verify the length, 
height, and shape of the curve. Remember that although center edge 
lines 8-5 and 7-6 do not really appear on the piece, they represent the 
widest part of the cylinder and where the curve defining the periphery 
changes directions from outward to inward (see Section 4-7). 



8-3 CUTS BELOW THE CENTER LINE 

Figure 8-4 is an example of a cylinder cut lengthwise below the 
center line. The problem is to find the top view when the front and side 



GIVEN: Front and side views. 
PROBLEM: Draw the top view. 




1 




Figure 8-4 Cylinders cut below the centerline. 



views are given. Figure 8-5 is the solution and was derived by the fol- 
lowing procedure: 

SOLUTION: 

1. Define the four comers of the cut surface 1-2-3-4 in the front 
and top views. 




Figure 8-5(a) 



Sec. 8-3 Cuts Below the Center Line 

2. Project points 1, 2, 3, and 4 into the top view. 



175 



3 




3 












4 2 












3 1 












7 




5 


/ 










56 


£Z 


:^ 


~x 




1 

J ' 4 | 




MP 




1,2 


1? 




24 



















Figure 8 -5(b) 



3, Connect points 1, 2, 3, and 4 with object lines to complete 
the top view. 



4- 




Figure 8-5(c) 



The plane 1-2-3-4 is a flat surface that has around surf ace directly 
under it. 



176 Inclined Cuts Chap. 8 

8-4 INCLINED CUTS 

Figure 8-6 is an example of an inclined cut. The problem is to find 
the top view when the front and right side views are given. Figure 8-7 
is the solution and was derived by the listed procedure: 



GIVEN: Front and side view. 
PROBLEM: Draw top view. 





Figure 8-6 Cylinder with an inclined cut. 
SOLUTION: 

1. Define the horizontal center line edge points 1, 9, 10, and 11 in 
the front and right side views. 

2. Project the horizontal center line edge points 1, 9, 10, and 11 
into the top view thereby defining the outside edge of the cyl- 
inder. 

3. Create points 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 in the right side view by 
marking off angles of 0°, 30°, 60°, 90°, 60°, 30°, and 0° from 
the horizontal center line (30° -increments were chosen because 
they are easy to draw with a 30-60-90 triangle). These points 
are for drawing purposes only and do not represent any corners 
or edges which appear on the piece and, therefore, they should 
be drawn very lightly. Once the solution has been derived, these 
points should be erased. 

4. Project points 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 into the front view. This is 
done by drawing lines parallel to the horizontal principal plane 
line from the created points 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 to the in- 
clined surface in the front view. Points (6, 4), (7, 3), and (8, 2) 
become double points in the front view. 

5. Project points 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 into the top view. 

6. Using a French curve, carefully draw in the elliptical shape by 
connecting points 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8. Be careful to avoid a 
lumpy or ragged curve. The finished ellipse should be smooth 
and symmetrical. 

7. Complete the top view by projecting the necessary points from 
the front and right side views. 




10,11 



Figure 8-7(a) 



11 






8 


9 








/ 






7 








£ 




5. 


6 
















4 














3 












10 






S 


1 


/ 






5 










4 


? n 






8,4* 


K 






|| 


f\ 


v"? 


\t J 


10,11 


8,2 






wf 


A 


A 


J 39 








1,9 


\ 


n 

V 


p 

















Figure 8-7(b) 




Figure 8-7(c) 



177 



178 

8-5 CURVED CUTS 



Cylinders 



Chap. 8 



Figure 8-8 is an example of a cylinder with a curved cut. The prob- 
lem is to find the top view when the front and right side views are given. 
Figure 8-9 is the solution and was derived by the listed procedure: 



GIVEN: Front and side views. 
PROBLEM: Draw the top view. 






Figure 8-8 Cylinder with a curved cut. 



SOLUTION: 



1. Define the horizontal center line edge points 1, 2, 3, and 4 in 
the front and right side views. 




Figure 8-9(a) 



Sec. 8-5 



Curved Cuts 



179 



2. Project the horizontal center line edge points 1, 2, 3, and 4 into 
the top view thereby defining the outside edge of the cylinder. 




Figure 8-9(b) 



3. Create points 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11 in the right side view by 
• marking off angles of 0°, 30°, 60°, 90°, 60°, 30°, and 0° from 
the horizontal center line (30° increments were chosen because 
they are easy to draw with a 30-60-90 triangle). These points 
are for drawing purposes only and would never appear on the 
piece; therefore, they should be drawn very lightly. After the 
solution has been derived, these points should be erased. 




Figure 8-9(c) 



180 



Cylinders 



Chap. 8 



4. Project points 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11 into the front view. This 
is done by drawing lines parallel to the horizontal principal 
plane line from the created points 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11 to 
the inclined surface in the front view. Points (5, 11), (6, 10), 
and (7, 9) become double points in the front view. 




Figure 8-9(d) 



5. Project points 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11 into the top view. 



1 


el 

7 


10 


11 


2 


y 
























8 






6 




k 


— A>-*" 




4 


a 




5 


3 / 






7 * 9 1 


'< 




^ 


* 


( 


1,4 


6,10- 


V 




2,3 34 ( 




1C 


\v 




5,11 


\ 


v^ 


^ 


r 



Figure 8-9(e) 



Sec. 8-6 



Chamfers 



181 



6. Using a French curve, carefully draw in the elliptical shape by 
connecting points 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11. Be careful to avoid 
a lumpy or ragged curve. The finished ellipse should be smooth 
and symmetrical. 





Figure 8-9(f ) 



7. Complete the top view by projecting necessary points from the 
front and right side views. 

This~ procedure is exactly the same as that used in Section 8-4 to 
solve inclined cut problems. However, because of the difference in the 
kind of cut, the resulting ellipse in the top view is different. 



8-6 CHAMFERS 



Chamfers are machine cuts, usually at 45°, along the edges or cor- 
ners of machined pieces. They are used to eliminate sharp, dangerous 
edges, to trim off material for clearance requirements, or to act as a 
kind of taper in aligning parts. They are not unique to cylinder prob- 
lems and Figure 8-10 gives two examples of chamfers in noncylindrical 
pieces. Figure 8-11 is an example of cylindrical chamfers. The problem 
is to find the top view where the front and right side views are given. 
Only the chamfered sections are labeled since the rest of the solution 
has been previously explained (Section 8-1). 

Consider line 2-3-4-5 in the right side view of Figure 8-12. It is 
an end view of a flat plane that was developed by machining away part 
of the cylinder and then chamfering the end. The chamfer creates two 
edge lines that show as concentric circles in the right side view and as 
parallel lines in the front view. This means that points 3 and 4 are in 
front of points 2 and 5 and that lines 2-3 and 4-5 are slanted in the top 
view. After defining points 2, 3, 4, and 5 in the front and side views, 
project them into the top view and draw lines 2-3, 3-4, and 4-5. There 
is no line 2-5. Why? 



182 



Cylinders 



Chap. 8 



J-x45°CHAMFER 





-J-x45°CHAMFER 




Figure 8-10 Chamfers on non-cylindrical shaped objects. 



GIVEN: Front and side views. 
PROBLEM: Draw the top-view. 







P ~w> 



Figure 8-11 Cylinder with chamfers. 



SOLUTION: 



1& 2534 



P 




Figure 8-1 2(a) 



A 



2 



16 23 



r 




Figure 8-1 2(b) 



h 



Figure 8-1 2(c) 



P "^ 



183 



184 



Cylinders 



Chap. 8 



8-7 HOLES 

When holes are drilled in cylinders, holes create unique drawing 
and projection problems. Figure 8-13 is an example of a cylinder that 
has two holes drilled completely through from top to bottom. Detail A 
is an enlargement of the top surface and has been drawn twice scale to 
accent the elliptical shape generated by the round hole. Even at twice 
scale, the ellipse is almost flat. Thus, in most drawings the ellipse is 
neglected and is drawn as a straight line as shown in Figure 8-13. This 
irregularity is acceptable drafting practice since it does not affect the 
accuracy of the communication. A machinist needs only to know what 
size hole and where to put it, and the fact that a round drill generates 
a slight elliptical shape in an orthographic projection will not affect his 
method of drilling. The ellipse is an unimportant result of the drilling 
and may be omitted. 



DETAIL A 



-|-DIA-2PLACES 




SEE DETAIL A 




Draw as a straight line 



Figure 8-13 How to draw holes in cylinders. 



This is not true if the hole is large. Where is the crossover point? 
When does a hole become large enough to require an ellipse to be drawn? 
There is no fixed rule to follow and the draftsman must use his own dis- 
cretion depending on his particular situation. 



8-8 ECCENTRIC CYLINDERS 



Eccentric cylinders are two or more cylinders whose center points 
are not matched. One cylinder is off center in relation to the other. 
Some students feel that eccentric problems are created by instructors 
who are eccentric, but no research has been done to prove or, for that 
matter, disprove this theory. 



Sec. 8-8 



Eccentric Cylinders 



185 



Eccentric problems should be approached as separate and indepen- 
dent cylinder problems. Break down the problems into the sections that 
make them up and solve them separately; then rejoin them to form a 
composite solution. Figure 8-14 is an example of an eccentric cylinder 
problem that requires a top view when front and right side views are 
given. Figure 8-15 is the solution and was derived by the listed pro- 
cedure: 



GIVEN: Front and side views. 
PROBLEM: Draw the front view. 





Figure 8-14 Eccentric cylinders. 



SOLUTION: 



1. Define the center line edge points 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the smaller 
diameter cylinder in the front and right side views. 

2. Project points 1, 2, 3, and 4 into the top view. 



34 



o3 



1.2 




Figure 8-1 5(a) 



186 



Cylinders 



Chap. 8 



3. Define the center line edge points 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the larger 
diameter cylinder in the front and right side views. 



8 




6 












/ 




4 




2 


/ 














? 














/ 




7 




5 






/ 
















? 






3 




1 


z. 












5,71 




_ 








3,4 




w 


5,6 


\s.8 






1.2 


1 ' 3 Vv 


my 













Figure 8-1 5(b) 



4. Project points 5, 6, 7, and 8 into the top view. 




Figure 8-1 5(c) 



5. Draw in the appropriate visible lines. 



8-9 HOLLOW SECTIONS 



Figure 8-16 is an example of a hollow cylinder. The problem is 
to find the top view when the front and right side views are given. 
Figure 8-17 is the solution and was arrived at by considering the out- 
side and inside diameters as separate cylinders, solving them inde- 
pendently, and forming a composite solution. The following steps were 
used: 



Sec. 8-9 



Hollow Sections 



187 



GIVEN: Front and side views. 
PROBLEM: Draw top view. 





Figure 8-16 Hollow cylinders. 



SOLUTION: 



On the outside cylinder, define the horizontal center line edge 
points of the cut surface 1-2-7-8 in the front and right side 
views. In other words, consider the problem to consist only of 
a solid cylinder, cut directly on the horizontal center line (see 
Section 8-2). 



1.357 



246 8 




Figure 8-1 7(a) 



2. Repeat step 1 for the inside cylinder, defining points 3, 4, 5, 
and 6. 



Igj Cylinders Chap. 8 

3. Project points 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 into the top view. 




Figure 8-1 7(b) 



4. Draw in the surfaces 1-2-3-4 and 5-6-7-8. Note that surfaces 
1-2-6-5 and 3-4-6-7 are flat rectangles and, with the excep- 
tion of the cylinder's ends, are the only flat surfaces in the 
problems. 

5. Complete the top view by projecting necessary points from the 
front and right side views. 




Figure 8-17(c) 



Problems 



189 



PROBLEMS 

Draw three views (front, top, and right side) of the following objects. 
If two views are given, redraw the given views and add the missing third 
view. Make a freehand three-dimensional sketch of the object if requested 
by your instructor. If a three-dimensional picture is used to present the 
object, draw the front, top, and right side views. Each square on the 
grid pattern is 0.20 per side. 

8-1 



3,50 



-1.13 




2.25 DIA 



8-2 





8-3 



3.00 



1.50 




190 

8-4 



8-5 



Cylinders 



Chap. 8 




4.00 



3.00 *- 



2.00 



1.00 



•—.25 TYP 




2.00 01 A 



8-6 




i-7 




Problems 



191 



8-8 



1.00- 



2.13 



■*- 1.50 

■« * 







8-9 




?- 



->- 



as 



:d 



u 



8-10 




192 

8-11 



Cylinders 



Chap. 8 



«3 



V 



1- 



m 



g= 



:*s 



5: 



8-12 



.75 R 





1.50 DIA 



8-13 All dimensions are in millimeters. 




58 DIA 



14 DIA 



Problems 



193 



8-14 




8-16 



150 DIA 




1.38DIA 



8-15 



1,75 DIA 



1.13 







8-17 Use B-size paper (11 X 17). 




2,75 DIA 



CASTINGS 



9 




Figure 9-0 A five-range MT 650 automatic transmission being 
pressure tested. Photograph courtesy of Detroit Diesel Allison— a 
Division of General Motors Corp. 



9-1 INTRODUCTION 

Objects which are made using the casting process present unique 
drawing problems. Because edges of cast objects are not square (90°), 
they cannot appear as lines in orthographic views. Also, these nonsquare 
edges often intersect each other which results in many unusually shaped 
lines. This chapter will present the techniques used to draw cast objects 
and will show how rounded edges may be represented. 



9-2 FILLETS AND ROUNDS 

A fillet is a concaved-shaped edge. A round is a convex shaped edge. 
Figure 9-1 illustrates these definitions. The size of a fillet or round is 
usually specified on a drawing by a note such as: 

ALL FILLETS AND ROUNDS -^R 

o 

although they may be dimensioned individually. 

From a drawing standpoint, fillets and rounds only appear in views 
taken at 90° to them, as shown in Figure 9-2. Note in Figure 9-2 that 
the lines that seem to represent edges represent surfaces. The actual 
edges are rounded and so do not appear in orthographic views unless 
they are shown in profile. 



Round 



Fillet 



-Round 



Figure 9-1 Fillets and rounds. 




^**- 



ALL FILLETS & ROUNDS -J-R 

4 

Figure 9-2 Orthographic views of a cast object. 



196 



Castings 



Chap. 9 



Most fillets and rounds are drawn by using a circle template be- 
cause they are too small to be easily drawn with a compass. Remember 
that when you use a circle template the hole sizes are given in diameters, 
not radii. Therefore, be sure to convert the given fillet and round sizes 
to diameters before you draw them. 



9-3 ROUND EDGE REPRESENTATION 

When you draw cast objects, how do you properly represent round- 
ed edges? Should the small curved lines, as shown in Figure 9-3(a) be 
used? Should the long, phantom lines, as shown in Figure 9-3(b), 
be used? Or should no lines be used, as shown in Figure 9-3(c)? 

In general, the small curved lines and the phantom lines are only 
used to indicate a rounded edge in a pictorial drawing. They are not 
used in orthographic views. However, since representation practices 
vary from company to company, always check the company standards 
before you start a drawing. 



Figure 9-3 No special shading or line work is required to repre- 
sent the rounded edges of cast object. 





( "i 1 

J •> 



(c) 




Sec. 9-4 Runouts 197 

94 RUNOUTS 

A runout is the intersection of two or more rounded edges. Run- 
outs appear on a drawing as curved sections at the end of the lines that 
represent surfaces. They generally turn out (that is, away from the sur- 
face lines), but this is not a hard, fast rule. Elliptical surfaces generate 
runouts that turn in ? as illustrated in Figure 9-4. Each object must be 
judged individually as to which runout direction looks the most realistic. 

Figure 9-5 shows several different examples of runouts. Draw run- 
outs either freehand or by using a curve as a guide. 





Runout 



Figure 9-4 A drawing which includes a 
runout. 



/&\ 





1 






' 








1 



4 i 

J I j 



I 1 ' 

I 
> ) \ * 




Figure 9-5 Example of two objects whose orthographic views in- 
clude runouts. 



198 Castings 

9-5 SPOTFACES AND BOSSES 



Chap. 9 



Spotfacing is a special machining operation that smoothes out the 
otherwise rough surface finish found on cast objects. It is similar to 
counterboring, but during spotfacing the surface of the object is cut 
just deep enough to produce a machined quality finish. 

Spotfacing is called out on a drawing by a note as shown in Figure 
9-6. First, the drill diameter is given, then the drill depth, if any, and 



aV?%° 



*o°*o< 




.500 DRILL — 1.000 S FACE 



Boss 




Spotface 




Drawn ^ 



Figure 9-6 A drawing which includes a spotface and a boss. 



finally the diameter of the spotface. Spotface depth is not specified un- 
less it is a design requirement. The machinist will cut just deep enough 
into the object to smooth out the surface. 

When you draw a spotface, draw the spotface depth 1/16". This 
depth enables the drawing reader to clearly see the spotface and is con- 
venient to draw. Other parts of the note are interpreted as shown in 
Figure 9-6. 

A boss is a raised portion of a casting as shown in Figure 9-6. 
Bosses are usually added to castings because they can be easily machined 
(being higher than the rest of the cast surface). Bosses are usually as 
high as the given fillet and round size. 



9-6 MACHINING MARKS 

Machining marks are used to differentiate those surfaces on a 
casting which are to be machined. Figure 9-7 illustrates different ma- 
chining marks and shows how they are used. 



Problems 



199 





2> 



ft. 









Rough 



Coarse 



Medium 



Fine 



32 



V 

V = Very fine 



r- About -|- 




60 v TVP Both sides 



Figure 9-7 Machining marks are used to indicate the quality of 
the surface finish required. 



PROBLEMS 

Draw three views (front, top, and side) of each of the following objects: 

9-1 

All fillets and rounds =J^R 

16 



.75DIA 



.50 Dl 
4 PLAC 




38DIA-2 PLACES 



.38 REF 



200 

9-2 



Castings 



Chap. 9 



75DIA 



1.38 




9-3 



All fillets and rounds = -g-R 



DIA-2 PLACES 




69 
i31DIA-4 PLACES 



. 



Problems 



201 



For the following problems, redraw the two given views and add the 
required missing view. Each square on the grid pattern is 0.20 per side. 

9-4 



TOP 



All fillets and rounds = ^R 

ID 



-— 1,50— ■- 


* 


C~ "^ 


r 



3.00 



.50 


-« *- 




LOO 






r > 


\ 
I 1M 


<^ 


■ 


t 


I 


-* 2.00 * 




"75 





9-5 




202 

9-6 



Castings 



Chap. 9 



TOP 



All fillets and rounds =4-R 




1,25 Ol A 



\ 



c 



1.75 



-1,25 
-.25 



■1.13 



9-7 

























:3jI 






_i 






^-^i£_«LtU^- HILSJ^lC^ 




~ / 


JL 


7 


£ — r-^ 7 r ~* — 5 1** Z ~ r ~I 


* — *< -- Z L 


h/->=>^ 2 t- 


12 11^ t I - 


ti ti i 


J ^ 1 _ 1 '- - *^' k. J f * 


■7*"* H l ^i**!* J > IP jj ~ 


r " " " 













Problems 



203 



9-8 



TOP 



All fillets and rounds = |-R 




9-9 



; 


I5> _ 




- 


1 _. , _ , — 




»* -^, — ^.- ^ — _^— , *r*-> 1 


j + r^ -- V 


::::::::^:2: == -5-"~r::::::;::::r-;;:: = z::: 


. _ . — ^^^___ 


..-_ „ i . — . 



SECTIONAL VIEWS 



10 




Figure 10-0 A model 400 Turbo Hydramatic. Photograph cour- 
tesy of General Motors Corp. 



10-1 INTRODUCTION 

Sectional views are used to expose internal surfaces of an object 
that would otherwise be hidden from direct view. Sectional views 
greatly add to the clarity of a drawing because they do not contain 
any hidden lines. 

To help you understand the differences between section cuts and 
regular orthographic views, study Figures 10-1 and 10-2. In Figure 
10-1 note the clarity of the internal profile of the object shown in the 
sectional view. In Figure 10-2 note that the sectional views are much 
easier to understand than are the regular orthographic views which 
contain many hidden lines. This does not mean that sectional views 
should be used instead of regular orthographic views. Sometimes sec- 





t i0 



1^° 











SECTION A-A 



Figure 10-1 A comparison between a regular orthographic view 
and a sectional view. 



205 



206 



Sectional Views 



Chap. 10 




i 



t-;+ 
i i 




...J- 






8^ 



^TTl^ 



\\M 






53 



V T^ 



z-Trri 



**£*• 



*® v >r 



Figure 10-2 A comparison between regular orthographic views 
and sectional views. 



tional views may be used to replace confusing regular orthographic 
views. At other times both views may be used. There are also many 
drawings that would not require section cuts at all. When and where 
to use a sectional view depends on the object being drawn. However, in 
any. situation, your prime concern should be that your drawings are 
easily understood. Always be as clear and direct as possible in the views 
that you present. 



10-2 CUTTING PLANE LINES 



Cutting plane lines are used to define the line along which an ob- 
ject is to be cut. They are drawn by using either of the two configura- 
tions shown in Figure 10-3. They should be drawn by using very heavy 
and very black lines— as heavy and black, if not more so, than visible 
lines. 

Cutting plane lines need not go directly through an object but may 
be offset as shown in Figures 10-4 and 10-5. Cutting plane lines are 
offset so that several internal surfaces may be shown in the same sec- 
tional view. The fact that a cutting plane line is offset does not appear 
in the sectional view. There should be no lines in the sectional view to 
indicate that the cutting plane line has changed direction. 

The arrowheads of a cutting plane line indicate the direction in 
which to observe the sectional view. The actual section view should be 



Sec. 1 0-2 



Cutting Plane Lines 



207 



L 




r 



16 



J 



L_- 




/ 



3 * < 1 
f to 1 T 



16 
Figure 10-3 Cutting plane line configurations. 






Figure 10-4 An offset cutting plane line. 







Figure 10-5 An offset cutting plane line. 



located behind the arrowheads or, if absolutely necessary, in alignment 
with the cutting plane line as illustrated in Figure 10-6. Under no cir- 
cumstances should the sectional view be placed ahead of the cutting 
plane line arrowheads. 

To help you visualize this convention, think of yourself as standing 
on the sectional view looking at the object being drawn. The cutting 
plane line arrowheads should point in the direction in which you are 
looking—away from the sectional view. 



208 



Sectional Views 



Chap. 10 




«**° 3SS 



^ 




ssfr 



Figure 10-6 Sectional view locations relative to the cutting plane 
line. 



10-3 SECTION LINES 

Section lines are used to indicate where, in a sectional view, solid 
material has been cut. There are many different section line patterns (a 
different pattern for each building material), but the most common pat- 
tern is the one shown in Figure 10-7. The lines are thin and black 
(about one-half as thick as visible lines) and are drawn at any inclined 
angle (45° is most often used). 

When two or more parts are gut by the same cutting plane line, the 
section cut lines must be varied to indicate clearly the different parts. 
Section lines may be drawn at different angles or with different spacing 
as is illustrated in Figure 10-8. 



Any Inclinded Angle 
(Usually 45°) 




Any Uniform Spacing 
J= Of Greater 

(Usually^-) 




Figure 10-7 Section lines. 



Figure 10-8 Four different objects in the 
same sectional view. 



Sec. 10-3 



Section Lines 



209 




Incorrect 




G°* 




Figure 10-9 The correct alignment of section lines. 



Do not draw section lines so that they are parallel to any surface 
in the object. For example, the upper right corner of the object pic- 
tured in Figure 10-9 is a 45° surface. It is wrong to draw section lines 
at 45°, parallel to the 45° surface. The lines must be drawn at another 
angle so that they are not parallel to the 45° surface. 

There are several techniques draftsmen use to draw section lines. 
One is to use an Ames Lettering Guide. Another is to slip a piece of 
graph paper under the drawing, align it as desired, and then trace the 
lines. Another technique is to scribe a line onto a 45-45-90 triangle 
as shown in Figure 10-10. Scribe the guide line 1/8" from and parallel 
to the edge of the triangle. If desired, several lines may be scribed. 






Figure 10-10 A 45-45-90 triangle which has a line scribed along 
the longest edge (see arrow). This scribed line is parallel to and 
1/8 from the edge of the triangle. Use the scribed line to align 
the triangle when drawing section lines. 







SECTION B-B 
SECTION A-A SECTION C-C 



Figure 10-11 Multiple sectional views. 



10-4 MULTIPLE SECTIONAL VIEWS 

It is possible \p take many sectional views through the same ortho- 
graphic view. Figure 10-11 demonstrates this by showing three sec- 
tional views, each taken through a different position of the same top 
view. Note how each sectional view is placed behind the arrowheads of 
the cutting plane line. As many sectional views as are necessary for clear 
definition of the object being studied may be shown. 

Although hidden lines are not shown in sectional views, visible 
lines are shown. Note, for example, that the V formation located on the 
back left surface of the object appears in all three sectional views. Any 
surface that may be directly seen, even if it is not located directly on 
the path of the cutting plane line, must be shown. For example, the tall 
center portion of the object shown in Figure 10-12 appears in section 



Same Edge 




SECTION B-B 



SECTION A-A 



Figure 10-12 Multiple sectional views. 



210 



Sec. 10-6 



Half Sectional Views 



211 



A-A because it may be directly seen. The shorter end section cannot be 
directly seen and, therefore, is not shown. However, note that part of 
the shorter left end section may be directly seen through the hole and, 
because it may be seen, it must be shown in the sectional view. Since in 
section B-B we are beyond the tall center section, it will be omitted in 
the sectional view. 



10-5 REVOLVED SECTIONAL VIEWS 

It is sometimes possible to save drawing a separate sectional view 
by drawing a sectional view directly on the regular orthographic view. 
This sectional view is called a revolved sectional view and is illustrated 
in Figure 10-13. A revolved sectional view is used to define the shape 
of an object that has a constant shape. 




Figure 10-13 Revolved sectional views. 



Figure 10-14 illustrates another revolved sectional view. This time 
the object has been broken open and the revolved sectional view has 
been placed between break lines. Either revolved sectional view (Figure 
10-13 or Figure 10-14) is acceptable. 




JL 

EZZZZZ22ZZZ3 




Figure 10-14 A revolved sectional view. 



10-6 HALF SECTIONAL VIEWS 



Regular orthographic views and sectional views may be combined 
within the same orthographic view to form a half sectional view. Figure 
10-1 5(a) shows a half sectional view. Note that the two views are 
separated by a center line and that each half is drawn independently of 
the other. The regular orthographic part of the view shows hidden lines, 
but the sectional view part does not. Half sections are particularly use- 
ful for drawing symmetrical objects. 

Study the cutting plane line in Figure 10- 15(a) and note how the 
left arrowhead is placed directly on the center line. Compare this with 
the cutting plane line of Figure 10-1 5(b) and then compare the dif- 
ferences in the resultant sectional views. By drawing the cutting plane 
line as shown in Figure 10-15(b), we eliminate the need to draw all 
hidden lines on the left side of the sectional view. Both Figures 10- 
15(a) and 10-15(b) are acceptable ways of drawing half sectional views. 



212 



Sectional Views 



Chap. 10 





Figure 10-1 5(a) A half sectional view. 



Figure 10-1 5(b) A half sectional view.. 



10-7 BROKEN OUT SECTIONAL VIEWS 

Sometimes less than a full or half sectional view is sufficient to 
clarify some internal surfaces of an object. In Figure 10-16, for example, 
the internal surfaces are symmetrical both vertically and horizontally. 
That is, the left and right halves are exactly the same as the top and 
bottom halves. Therefore, in this example we only need to show a 
small piece of the internal surfaces to give the reader a good idea of 
the entire internal shape of the object. We do this by using a broken 
out sectional view as shown in Figure 10-16. 




Figure 10-16 A broken out sectional view. 



Broken out sectional views are sectional views drawn on a regular 
orthographic view and are created by theoretically breaking off a part 
of the external surface of the object, thereby exposing some of the 
internal surfaces to direct view. When you break open the object, use 
a break line to outline the place where the external surfaces have been 
broken. A cutting plane line is not required. 

Figure 10-17 is another example of a broken out sectional view. 



Sec. 10-8 



Projection Theory 



213 




Figure 10-17 A broken out sectional view. 



10-8 PROJECTION THEORY 

The projection theory presented in Chapter 4 and continued 
throughout this book is also applicable to sectional views. Figure 10-18 
illustrates its application. 

Most sectional views are drawn without the aid of projection theory, 
but as with regular orthographic views, projection theory is very helpful 
in checking lines. 




A -♦-'a -* J 



SECT C-C 



SECT B-B 



SECT A-A 



Figure 10-18 A multiple sectional view problem solved using 
projection theory. 



214 



Sectional Views 



Chap. 10 



10-9 HOLES IN SECTIONAL VIEWS 

A common mistake that is made in drawing holes in a sectional 
view is to omit the back edge of the hole. Even if a hole is cut in half 
in a sectional view, the back edges must be shown in the sectional view. 
Figure 10-19, which shows a counterbored hole, uses an isometric 
drawing, a regular orthographic view, and a sectional view. In each view 
the arrows point to approximately the same point on the back edge of 
the hole. Note how lines that represent the back edges of the hole ap- 
pear in the sectional view. When you draw holes in a sectional view, 
make sure that the back edge of the hole is represented. 




Back Edge of Hole 



Figure 10-19 A hole in a sectional view. 



10-10 AUXILIARY SECTIONAL VIEWS 

Auxiliary sectional views may be created in the same way that 
auxiliary views are created (see Chapter 11). Use the cutting plane line 
to define the angle at which the view is to be taken and be sure to 
include sectioning lines where material has been cut. Either complete 
or partial auxiliary sectional views may be drawn. Figures 11-8 and 
11-9 illustrate two auxiliary sectional views. 



10-11 DIMENSIONING SECTIONAL 
VIEWS 



Sectional views are very helpful in presenting clear, well-defined 
dimensions. In Chapter 6 we learned that it is considered poor practice 
to dimension to hidden lines. Yet, there are many objects that contain 
so many internal surfaces that it is impossible to dimension without 
referring to hidden lines. By drawing sectional views, we open up to 



Problems 



215 




Figure 10-20 An example of a dimensioned sectional view. 



direct view the internal surfaces, thereby changing hidden lines to solid 
lines which, in turn, give us solid, well-defined lines to dimension to. 
Figure 10-20 illustrates how a sectional view may be dimensioned. 
Note that the extension lines cross over the section lines. Also note the 
small gap between the end of the extension line and the line that it is 
defining on the object. 



PROBLEMS 

Assume that the following are sectional views of several different ob- 
jects. Redraw the sectional views and add section lines. Each square on 
the grid is 0.20 per side. 

10-1 



m 



iSSi 








216 

10-2 



Sectional Views 



£hap. 10 




Redraw the front view and replace the side view with a sectional view. 
Each square on the grid is 0.20 per side. 

10-3 



.25DIA 
TYP 



.88 OIA 



30' 
2 PLACES 




Problems 



217 



10-4 




10-5 




.63 R 



1.00 R 



too 



75DJA 



2.00 



.50 [— 



— H 



38 



/ | I— 1 



r-t 



---i 



— ^ i i 




aoo 



30 v 



218 

10-6 



Sectional Views 



Chap. 10 



.50DIA 



.25 BOTH 
SIDES 




10-7 



1,25 DIA 



1.75 DIA 



3.25 




ALL FILLET AND ROUNDS = £R 



Problems 



219 



10-8 Redraw the top view and replace the front view with a sectional 
view. 



75 DIA- 4 PLACES 
1.63R 



2.38R 



.50 DIA 




1.00DIA 



2.00 



L 1.00 



10-9 Redraw the front and side views and add the appropriate sec- 
tional views. 



1.00 



5,00 



33 



i 



.38 

T 

.88 



-< 2.00 ** 



X4 



"wf 




n 



3 



1.50 






1.00 



,-i. 



-* — 1.50- 



-1C0-- 



-I 



.33 



5.00 - 
REF 



.38 

1 



1.50 



n ■ i 

/ — +_ 






=1 



h~h 



.25— -J 
— 4 



38H- 



HOLE 


X 


y 


DIA 


A 


150 


2 00 


.08 


B 


1.00 


1-00 


.63 


C 


2 50 


m 


.50 


D 


3.63 


213 


.75 


E 


3.29 


1.13 


.75 



3.00 



.75 



1.31 



220 



Sectional Views 



Chap. 10 



10-10 Redraw the following sectional view and add the appropriate 
sectional views. Assume that all the pieces are round. Each square 
on the grid is 0.20 per side. 




Draw a front view and sectional view of the following. Each triangle on 
the grid pattern is 0.20 per side. 

10-11 



T.88R 



2.50DIA 



1.25 DIA 




1.00 



Problems 



221 



10-12 







10-13 



2.00 Dl A 



-2£z™^- 




4.25 



THE OBJECT IS 
SYMMETRICAL 



10-14 




222 



Sectional Views 



Chap. 10 



10-15 Draw a front and side view of the following object. Then draw 
two sectional views, one as defined by cutting plane A and one 
as defined by cutting plane B. Cutting plane A is located 1.25 
from the left end of the object. Cutting plane B is located 1.00 
from the right end. 




1.00 R 



END VIEW 



AUXILIARY VIEWS 



11 








£^***r*^ 



i-—-..-. .^ : 



■-.;<r^ •»»•*' 



*^^^1 




Figure 11-0 Photograph courtesy of TEREX Division, General 
Motors Corp. 



11-1 INTRODUCTION 

Auxiliary views are any orthographic views other than the three 
principal views. They are usually drawn to show the true shape of a sur- 
face that otherwise would appear distorted in the normal front, top and 
right side view format. For example, in Figure 11-1 neither the true 
shape of surface 1-2-3-4 or the true shape of the V6 diameter hole is 
shown in any of the given views. This means that even though three 
views of the object are presented, from a visual standpoint, the drawing 
is incomplete and therefore unsatisfactory. 

Figure 11-2 shows the same object that was shown in Figure ll-l, 
but this time using only two orthographic views: a front view and an 
auxiliary view. The auxiliary view is an orthographic view taken per- 
pendicular to surface 1-2-3-4. This two-view drawing is actually more 
effective in its presentation of the object than is the three-view drawing. 
Thanks to the auxiliary view, it defines the true shape of surface 1-2- 
3-4 and the Vi" diameter hole as well as all other necessary information. 
Deciding when and where to use auxiliary views depends on the 
object being presented and on how its individual surfaces are positioned. 
Always use auxiliary views to add clarity to your drawings and thereby 
to make the technical information you are presenting easier to under- 
stand. 





Figure 11-1 Three views of an inclined surface. 



224 



Sec. 1 1 -2 



Reference Line Method 



225 




Figure 11-2 A front view and an auxiliary view of the object 
presented in Figure 11-1. 



11-2 REFERENCE LINE METHOD 

Two methods may be used to create auxiliary views: the reference 
line method, explained in this section, and the projection theory method, 
explained in the next section. Figure 11-3 is a sample problem in which 
you are given two views and are asked to create an auxiliary view that 
clearly presents surface 1-2-3-4-5. Figure 11-4 is the solution and was 
derived by using the reference line method as follows: 



GIVEN: Front and side views. 

PROBLEM: Draw an auxiliary view using the reference line meth- 
od. 

GIVEN: Front and side views. 

PROBLEM: Draw an auxiliary view using the projection theory 

method. 



9,10 




9,4 
72 S3 




5,10 



Figure 11-3 



226 



Auxiliary Views 



Chap. 11 



SOLUTION: Using the reference line method: 

1. Draw a vertical line between the front and right side views and 
draw a line parallel to surface 1-2-3-4-5-6. Define the vertical 
line as reference line 1. Define the line parallel to surface 1-2- 
3_4-5 a s reference line 2. 



Reference 
Line 2 




1 6 

Reference Line 1 



Figure 11 -4(a) 



2. Label points 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and any other points you feel 
you'll need in both the front and right side views. 

3. Project all points in the front view into the auxiliary views by 
drawing very light lines perpendicular to reference line 2 from 
the front view points into the area where the auxiliary view will 
be. 




Se*. 11-2 



Reference Line Method 



227 



4. Using either dividers or a compass, transfer the points from the 
right side view to the auxiliary view by transferring the. per- 
pendicular distance from reference line 1 to the point, to refer- 
ence line 2 along the appropriate point projection line created 
in step 3. This is possible because the distance between refer- 
ence line 1 and the right side view and the points is the same as 
the distance between reference line 2 and the auxiliary view. 
Label all points in the auxiliary view. 




5. Lightly draw in the auxiliary view by lightly connecting the 
appropriate points. Check your work. 

6. Erase all excess lines, point labels, and smudges and draw in all 
lines to their final configuration and color. 




9,10 



5,10 



Figure 11 -4(d) 



228 



Auxiliary Views 



Chap. 1 1 



Note that surfaces 4-5-9-10 and 2-3-8-7 are distorted in the 
auxiliary view. 

Figures 11-5 and 11-6 are further examples of auxiliary views 
drawn by using the reference line method. 





Figure 11-5 An auxiliary view created using 
the reference line method. 



Figure 11-6 An auxiliary view created 
using the reference line method. 



11-3 PROJECTION THEORY METHOD 

The projection theory presented in Chapter 4 may also be applied 
to auxiliary views. The problem of Figure 11-3 is again presented, but 
this time it is solved by using the projection theory method. The solu- 
tion is illustrated in Figure 11-7 and was derived by using the following 
procedure: 

SOLUTION: Using the projection method: 

1. Draw a vertical line between the front and right side views and 
draw a line parallel to surface 1-2-3-4-5-6. Draw the lines so 
that they intersect. Label the intersection point 0. Through 
point draw two more lines: one perpendicular to the vertical 
line (therefore a horizontal line) and one perpendicular to the 
line drawn parallel to surface 1-2-3-4-5-6. 



Line Parallel 

to Surface 1-2-3-4-5-6 





Line 



Point 




3 



Vertical Line 



Figure ll-7(a) 

Project the points labeled in the side view into the area where 
the auxiliary view will be by first drawing vertical projection 
lines from the points to the horizontal line drawn in step 1. 
Then, using a compass set on point 0, draw projection arcs 
which will continue the vertical projection lines from the 
horizontal line to the line perpendicular to the line parallel to 
surface 1-2-3-4-5-6. Continue the projection lines parallel 
to surface 1-2-3-4-5-6 as shown. 





o\ 










/ 


2 


4 
3 




5 


















1 






3 



Figure 11 -7(b) 



229 



230 



Auxiliary Views 



Chap. 11 



3. Project the points from the front view by drawing lines per- 
pendicular to the line drawn parallel to surface 1-2-3-4-5-6. 
Label the intersections of these projection lines with the ones 
drawn in step 2 with the appropriate numbers. 




Figure ll-7(c) 

4. Erase all excess lines, point labels, and smudges and draw in all 
lines to their final configuration and color. 




5.10 



Figure 11 -7(d) 



Sdc. 1 1-5 



Partial Auxiliary Views 



231 



Note that the solution derived by the projection theory method is 
exactly the same as the solution derived by the reference line method. 
Either method will generate an accurate answer and the choice of which 
method to use depends on the preference of the individual draftsman. 



11-4 AUXILIARY SECTIONAL VIEWS 

Auxiliary sectional views are a combination of an auxiliary view and 
sectional view. They are orthographic views taken through an object at an 
angle defined by a cutting plane line. They adhere to the same rules and 
format given for sectional views in Chapter 10, and they are drawn for 
the same reasons: to expose surfaces that are hidden from direct view in 
the regular front, top, and right side views. 

Figure 11-8 is an example of a drawing that contains an auxiliary 
sectional view. Figure 11-9 is an example of a drawing that contains a 
partial auxiliary sectional view. Either the reference line or projection 
line method may be used to create auxiliary sectional views. 





SECTION A-A 




Figure 11-8 An auxiliary sectional view. 



Figure 11-9 A partial auxiliary sectional view. 



11-5 PARTIAL AUXILIARY VIEWS 



Auxiliary views are helpful in clarifying drawings, but their use 
does have drawbacks. For example, surface 1-4-6-5 which appeared 
true size in the top view of Figure 11-1 appears distorted in the auxiliary 
view in Figure 11-3. The same is true of surface 2-7-8-3. By trying to 
create a view that will clarify one surface, we have distorted two other 
views. To eliminate distortion in the principal views, we have created 
auxiliary views which in turn have created other distortions. 

The solution is to use partial auxiliary views. Figure 11-10 shows 
the same object that was shown in Figures 11-1 and 11-2 and was 
drawn using a front view and a partial auxiliary view. As the name 



232 



Auxiliary Views 



Chap. 11 




Not included 



Figure 11-10 Front and partial auxiliary views of an object. 



implies, a partial auxiliary view is only part of a complete auxiliary 
view. Partial auxiliary views enable you to limit your auxiliary view to 
one specific surface or part of a surface, thereby eliminating the need 
to draw surfaces that have become distorted in the auxiliary views. 
If only one complete surface is shown in the partial auxiliary view, 
as is the case in Figure 11-10, break lines need not be shown. If how- 
ever, part of a surface or more, than one surface is to be drawn, break 
lines are shown. 



11-6 SECONDARY AUXILIARY VIEWS 



It is sometimes necessary to draw an auxiliary view of an auxiliary 
view. This occurs when the first auxiliary view does not completely 
define or does not clearly present the surface being studied. For example, 
Figure 11-11 shows a front, top, right side, and auxiliary view of an 
object that contains an oblique surface (surface 1-2-3). Despite the 
great number of views taken of the object, none of the given views 
shows the true shape of surface 1-2-3. To present a true shape of sur- 
face 1-2-3, we must use a secondary auxiliary view. 

The true shape of surface 1-2-3 will only be shown in an ortho- 
graphic view taken at exactly 90° to the surface. To help you visualize 
this concept, think of an airplane in flight. If the airplane is flying 
directly away from you, parallel to your line of sight (0°), it will give 
little or no indication of its true speed. It will simply seem to slowly 
disappear. If, however, the airplane is flying directly across your line of 
vision (90°), it will give a correct indication of its true speed. Similarly, 
only when a line or a plane is directly across your line of vision (an 
orthographic view taken at exactly 90° to your line of vision) can you 
see its true shape. 





Figure 11-11 What is the true shape of surface 1-2-3? None of 
these views define it. 



But how can we be assured that our secondary auxiliary view is 
taken at 90° to the surface? If we want our secondary view to be 90° 
to a surface, the first auxiliary view must be taken 0° to the surface 
because each auxiliary view will be 90° to the previous one. 

To draw an auxiliary view that is at 0° to the surface (an end 
view of the surface), we must identify a true length line on the sur- 
face. A true length line is the only line on the surface whose angle 
relative to the principal plane lines we know exactly. Because we know 
the exact angle of a true length line relative to the principal plane lines, 
we know the angle at which to draw an auxiliary view which will be an 
end view of the line and therefore an end view of the surface in which 
the line is located. 

A true length line is found by the following axiom: 

An orthographic view of a line shows the true length 
(TL) of that line if one of the other orthographic views 
of that line is parallel to one of the principal plane lines. Axiom 1 1 -1 

Figure 11-12 illustrates this axiom. Note that so long as one of the 
given orthographic views is parallel to one of the principal plane lines, 
the other view of the line is a true length. If none of the views of the 
line is parallel to either principal plane line, then none of the given 
views is a true length. Also note that because one of the lines in a sur- 
face is true length, it does not mean that all the other lines in the 
surface are true length. 

In the example of Figure 11-11, line 1-2 is true length in the top 
view, line 1-3 is true length in the front view, and line 2-3 is true length 
in the right side view. We could use any one of these lines to generate 
an auxiliary view that is 0° to the surface 1-2-3. Line 1-2 was used for 
this example. 



233 



<> 'i 



V 



\ 



»&■■<! 



D 







i 3 



/ 



4-^ 



c 



1 



234 



Sec. 1 1 -6 



Secondary Auxiliary Views 



235 



Figure 11-13 is the solution to the problem presented in Figure 
11-11 and was derived by using the following procedure: 

SOLUTION: 

1. Identify in one of the given views a true length line. In this 
example line 1-2 meets the criterion set by axiom 11-1. 





Figure 11-13(») 



2. Extend line 1-2 and draw lines parallel to the extension of line 
1-2 throughout the other known points on the surface. 





Figure 11 -13(b) 



236 



Auxiliary Views 



Chap. 11 



Draw in the principal plane line between the two given views 
and label it reference line 1. Also draw a line somewhere along 
the extension lines drawn in step 2. The line must be perpen- 
dicular to those lines. Label it reference line 2. 



Reference Line 2 




: : ^ — Reference Line 1 



Figure 11-1 3(c) 



4. Measure the distance from reference line 1 to point 1 in the 
view that contains line 1-2 parallel to the principal plane line. 
Transfer this distance to reference line 2 as shown. Make sure 
that you transfer the distance to the line that was originally 
extended through point 1. Do the same with all other points 
in the surface. Measure the distance from the point to reference 
line 1, and then transfer this distance to reference line 2 as 
shown. 




Figure 11 -13(d) 



Sec. 11-6 



Secondary Auxiliary Views 



237 



5. Using appropriate point numbers, label the first auxiliary view 
you have now generated. 




End view of 
Plane 1-2-3 



Figure 11-1 3(e) 



6. Draw lines perpendicular to the auxiliary view through all 
points on the surface as shown. Draw a line parallel to the end 
view of the surface and label it reference line 3 . 




Reference Line 3 



Figure 11 -13(f) 



238 



Auxiliary Views 



Chap. 1 1 



7. Measure the distance from reference line 2 to point 1 in the 
view in which line 1-2 appeared true length. Transfer this 
distance to reference line 3 as shown. Do the same with all 
other points in the surface. 

8. Label the secondary auxiliary view of the surface with the 
appropriate point numbers and darken in all lines to the final 
color and configuration. Leave on all construction lines unless 
you are specifically told to erase them. This will make it easier 
for someone to check or follow your work. 




True Shape of 
Plane 1-2-3 



Figure 11-1 3(g) 



Figure 11-14 is the solution to the problem stated in Figure 11-11, 
except that in Figure 11-14 line 2-3 was used to generate the first 
auxiliary view. The problem was solved by using the procedure out- 
lined for Figure 11-13. Note that the true shape of surface 1-2-3 is 
exactly the same as that generated in Figure 11-13. Study and carefully 
verify how each point was transferred from reference line to reference 
line. 

Sometimes none of the given lines that define a surface is of true 
length. This does not mean that a secondary auxiliary view of the sur- 
face cannot be created. It simply means that we have to create a true 
length line from the given information and then proceed as before. For 
example, the surface 1-2-3 pictured in Figure 11-15 contains no true 
length lines and yet the problem asks us to find the true shape of that 
surface which we know can only be accomplished through a secondary 
auxiliary view. 



Sec. 1 1 -6 



Secondary Auxiliary Views 



239 




Figure 11-14 The true shape of plane 1-2-3 found by using the 
true length view of line 2-3. 



GIVEN: Front and top views. 

PROBLEM: Draw the true shape of plane 1-2-3. 




NO True Length Lines 




2 



Figure 11-15 



To create a true length line in surface 1-2-3, first draw a line in 
one of the views that is parallel to one of the principal plane lines. Then 
project this line into the other view of the surface. In this example the 
new line was labeled 1-x where point x lays along the known line 2-3. 
To project point x from the top view into the front view, draw a line 
parallel to the line drawn between the two known point 1 's and perpen- 
dicular to the principal plane line from point x in the top view to a 



240 



Auxiliary Views 



Chap. 11 



point of intersection with line 2-3 in the front view. The solution to 
the problem is completed as previously outlined based on the true 
length line Q-x. Figure 11-16 is the solution to the problem stated in 
Figure 11-15. 

SOLUTION: 







Figure 11 -16(a) 



Figure 11 -16(b) 



Figure ll-16(c) 



True Shape 




Figure 11 -16(d) 



Problems 



241 



PROBLEMS 



Redraw the following objects and add the appropriate auxiliary views: 
11-1 



'II 


" x ^— jiaiuL_ 


v.zl/- - -----r 


-- — -■-{- 


i_ «_™ — i ■■■ 


... .. M .... 








"^s / 


^t v iT 


. *S£ —- <rfi° 


/ / N 


V j ^ % J 


|T i t t -L 




' / V 


t .A-2 £ [j 


__ i__j__i --- J 


t 1 


' 





11-2 



HEXAGON 
1.75 ACROSS FLATS 




50X.50 SQUARE HOLE 
Perpendicular to 
inclined surface 



11-3 



| | j | fl^C|r^|A|-|SjffLjA|C|E|S| | |_| | | | | | | | | | | [ _ 




3 *."~ w "*" 


P v* 1 


P L 


V N 


"' ^r j l 


S \ 




.„. z~.~^y:z.. ____j^ j.l-..- i: 




\ 


^ 





242 

11-4 



Auxiliary Vitws 



Chap. 11 



1.25 




11-5 




11-6 




2.00 



m 



[« 2.00 - 



1.38-* 
-.89 



z 



A, 



45 
* 2.00 »- 



-.50 



r 



25 



1 



11-7 



!i 







s s 



IS 



s 



i 



m 



11-8 



2 LARGE HOLES-.75DIA 
1 SMALL HOLE -.50 Dl A 



1.94 



.75 




11-9 



11-10 



45' 




1,75 
.25- 



ze: 



60 




1 



3fr 



U 



63 



I — «* 




138 

A 



^-.88 



• 




11-11 



.38 Dl A -12 PLACES 



2,00 



1.06 




244 



Auxiliary Views 



Chap. 11 



Using a secondary auxiliary view, derive the true shape of the following 
planes. Each square of the grid is 0.20 per side. 



11-12 


2 


C ■ **■ * 


\ ^^"^ 1 ill— 


J ^^fc #1 


*~ \i ***■* * 


\ rf** J 


*s 1- *^ 


.j 4 








i« - 


3-S** 


t- -*, -r~ - 


-i - ^*^1 


/ m ^m ' ^ \&1WL 


^t* - ** ~^L 


— — £-»■= 






_^ 



11-13 



, 


._!. 






1 






Ikf' 


L_ ' 4 ^"^'-~ 




..s„ 


*■ h » I 


3 




















r 3 








r "7 


-""""■"^-O 




JP'*' 












, . £«tf± 






^ 









Draw sufficient views to completely define the following objects. In 
each case, include a secondary auxiliary view of the oblique surface. 



11-14 




Problems 



245 



11-16 



.25 0! A 




19 OIA 



FASTENERS 



12 







Figure 12-0 Photograph of an Allison 501-M62B turboshaft 
engine courtesy of Detroit Diesel Allison Division of General 
Motors Corp. 



12-1 INTRODUCTION 

There are two basic fasteners: mechanical and nonmechanical. Me- 
chanical fasteners include bolts, rivets, and screws and, from a design 
standpoint, they are usually stronger, easier to work with, and more 
easily replaced than nonmechanical fasteners. Nonmechanical fasteners 
include glues, epoxies, tapes, and so on, and they are usually less expen- 
sive, lighter, and require less installed space than do mechanical fasteners. 

This chapter deals exclusively with mechanical fasteners. Non- 
mechanical fasteners are not drawn, but they are noted on a drawing 
as shown in Figure 12-1. Mechanical fasteners, however, have specific 
representations that must be clearly and accurately drawn. 




EPOXY PER 
SPEC NO. 56A 



Figure 12-1 A call out for a nonmechanical fastener. 



12-2 THREAD TERMINOLOGY 

Figure 12-2 illustrates some of the basic terms used to describe a 
thread. These terms are common to all kinds of threads and will be 
referred to throughout the chapter. 



Pitch, P 




Major Diameter, D 



1 — Minor Diameter 



Figure 12-2 Some basic terms used to describe a thread. 



247 



248 



Fasteners 



Chap. 12 



The pitch of a thread is equal to 1 over the number of threads per 



inch. 



P - 



Number of threads per inch 



(12-1) 



A thread made with 20 threads per inch, for example, has a pitch of 
0.05". 



P - - - 0.05 



A thread with eight threads per inch has a pitch of 0.125' 



P = -=- = 0.125 

8 



1 2-3 THREAD NOTATIONS 



-i--2pUNF-2 




\ V-ciasa of nt 

\ ^Thread Category 
Threads per l«ch 

Major Diameter 



Figure 12-3 The definition of a thread 
notation. 



Figure 12-3 shows a typical thread notation and a definition of 
each term The terms major diameter and threads per inch (pitch) have 
already been explained in Section 12-2 and Figure 12-2. The terms 
thread category and class of fit require further explanation. 

Threads are generally manufactured to either National Coarse or 
National Fine standards, although there are several other categories of 
thread standards (Unified Extra Fine, for example). These standards are 
internationally agreed upon manufacturing specifications that result in 
products of uniform quality and interchangeability. From a drawing 
standpoint, there is no difference between any of the standards, for 
they all use the same representations. 

Class of fit refers to the way in which two threads match each 
other. There are four categories: classes 1, 2, 3, and 4. The higher the 
number, the better quality the match-up. Class 1 is a very sloppy fit; 
class 2 is the most commonly manufactured fit and is generally ac- 
ceptable in most design situations; classes 3 and 4 are rarely specified 
because they are very exact and very expensive. 



12-4 THREAD REPRESENTATION 

There are three ways to represent threads on a drawing: detailed, 
schematic, and simplified. From a drawing standpoint, each representa- 
tion has advantages and disadvantages. The detailed representation is 
very easy for the reader to understand, but it is very time-consuming 
to draw. The simplified representation is very easy to draw, but to the 
uneducated reader, it is very confusing. The schematic representation 
is a compromise-fairly easy to draw and fairly easy to read, but it is 
still inexact and time-consuming. The representation chosen will de- 
pend on the specific shop or drafting requirements applicable. 



Sec. 12-4 Thread Representation 249 

Simplified Representation (Figure 12-4): 

(a) Define the major diameter, thread length, and shaft length 
of the desired thread. 



Shaft Length 



-Thread Length 



-Major Diameter, I 



Figure 12-4(a) Simplified thread representation. 



(b) Draw a 45°-chamfer 1/16 or 1/8 long on the end of the 
threaded portion of the shaft. The choice of 1/16 or 1/8 
depends on which looks better. 




i-i 



Figure 12 -4(b) 

(c) Draw hidden lines as shown. If you used 1/16 in step (b), then 
use it here. If you used 1/8, then use 1/8. 



-^OT 



16 U 'T 



T 



Figure 12-4(c) 



(d) Darken in the visible lines and add the appropriate thread 
call out. 




Y"16UNC-2A 



Figure 12-4(d) 



250 



Fasteners 



Chap. 12 



Schematic Representation (Figure 12-5): 

(a) Define the major diameter, thread length, and shaft length of 
the desired thread. 



Shaft Length 



Thread Length 



1 — Major Diameter, D 
Figure 12-5(a) Schematic thread representation. 



: : ■ 



(b) Draw parallel lines as shown. Draw these lines extremely 
lightly because they will be erased later. The choice of 1/16 
or 1/8 depends on which looks better. 






1 rt r 1 

i6 or T 



Figure 12-5(b) 



(c) Draw lines perpendicular to the lines drawn in step (b) as 
shown. If 1/16 was used in step (b), space them 1/16 apart. If 
1/8 was used in step (b), space them 1/8 apart. 



"1M 



1S°'T 






Figure 12-5(c) 



(d) Draw 45°-chamfers at the threaded end of the shaft as shown. 
Draw lines parallel to and halfway between the lines drawn 
in step (c). Start and end these lines as they intersect the lines 
drawn in step (b). 




Figure 12 -5(d) 



Sec. 124 



Thread Representation 



251 



(e) Darken the lines created in step 4 and all visible lines as 
shown. Add the appropriate thread call out. 





^--16UNC~2A 



Figure 12-5(e) 



If desired, the spacing of the lines drawn in step (c) may be made 
exactly equal to the thread pitch. 



Detailed Representation (Figure 12-6): 

(a) Define the major diameter, thread length, and shaft length of 
the desired thread. 



Shaft Length 



-Thread Length 



—Major Diameter, D 
Figure 12-6(a) Detailed thread representation. 



(b) Along the top edge of the shaft mark off as many distances 
P as will fit within the desired thread length. Mark off a 
distance of x hP along the bottom edge. 
Note: This is a right-hand thread. When the designated thread 
is a left-hand thread, the P distances would be marked off 
along the lower edge and the x hP distance along the top edge. 



1 



JL 



*> 



Figure 12-6(b) 



252 



Fasteners 



Chap. 12 



(c) Connect the first P distance with the l AP distance. Then draw 
lines, parallel to this line, through each of the P distances as 
shown. 




Figure 12-6(c) 



(d) Draw short 60° -lines as shown. 




■No line 
Figure 12-6(d) 



(e) Draw short 60° -lines so that they intersect the lines drawn in 
step (d) as shown. 




Figure 12 -6(e) 

(f) Connect the intersections of the 60°-lines as shown. These 
lines are not parallel to the lines drawn in step (c). 




Figure 12-6(f) 



(g) Darken the lines as shown and add the appropriate thread call 
out. 




1- 16UNC-2A 



Figure 12-6(g) 



Sec. 1 2-5 Threads in a Sectional View 

12-5 THREADS IN A SECTIONAL VIEW 



253 



Figure 12-7 shows the three different thread representations as 
they appear in a sectional view. Note that the simplified representation 
includes hidden lines. Hidden lines are drawn in sectional views when a 
simplified representation is used and in all end views of threaded holes 
regardless of the representation. 



& 





^ 



fc^^j 




Figure 12-7(a) Simplified representation. 





Figure 12-7(b) Schematic representation. 






& 





Figure 12-7(c) Detailed representation. 



254 



Fasteners 



Chap. 12 



12-6 THREADS 

There are several different kinds of threads: square, acme, knuckles, 
sharp V, and others. Figure 12-8 shows profiles of these threads. 

A double thread has two threads cut on the same shaft. When it is 
rotated, it advances or recedes twice as fast as a single thread (one 
revolution of a double thread will transverse twice the distance traveled 
by one revolution of a single thread). Double threads may be cut in any 
thread-square, UNC, UNF, and so on. Figure 12-9 includes a double 
thread drawn by using simplified representation. Note how the thread 
note is written and that the picture portion of the drawing is the same 
as for single threads. 




SQUARE 




ACME 




KNUCLE 



SHARP V 



Figure 12-8 Various thread profiles. 






-^-12 UNC-2A, DOUBLE 
x 2.00 LONG 



Figure 12-9 A double thread call out and simplified representa- 
tion. 



Most threads are right-hand threads-that is, they advance when 
they are turned clockwise. There are also left-hand threads. The oxygen 
lines in most hospitals are made with left-hand threads as a safety pre- 
caution to prevent an accidental mix-up with other gas lines. The 
schematic and detailed representations are drawn the same for left- or 
right-hand threads. Only the notation is amended to include an "LH 






Sec. 12-8 



Threaded Holes 



255 



for left-hand threads. It is assumed that a thread is a right-hand thread 
if LH does not appear. Figure 12-10 illustrates a call out note for a 
left-hand thread. 



f -18UNF 



2A-L.H.X.75 LONG 



Figure 12-10 A left hand thread call out and schematic repre- 
sentation. 



The detailed representation of a left-hand thread is different from 
the detailed representation of a right-hand thread. To draw a left-hand 
thread, use the same procedure but change the initial P/2 offset shown 
in step 2 of Figure 12-6 from the top edge to the bottom edge of the 
thread. 



12-7 TYPES OF BOLTS AND SCREWS 

Figure 12-11 illustrates several of the many different mechanical 
fasteners that are commercially available. The exact size and shape spec- 
ifications are available from the manufacturers. 



C3 



C^ 



^=U=p, 



b. 



c. 



Figure 12-11 Different types of mechanical fasteners, (a) Flat- 
head, (b) Fillester Head, (c) Round Head, (d) Oval Head. 



12-8 THREADED HOLES 



When you draw a threaded hole representation, it is important to 
know how such a hole is created. First, a hole, called a pilot hole, is 
drilled. This hole is then tapped (threads are cut into the surface of the 
pilot hole). Holes are not usually tapped all the way to the bottom of 
the pilot hole because this would cause severe damage to the tapping 



Pilot hold depth 
Thread dapth 







Oft 



Figure 12-12 A tapped hole. 

bit (although special tapping bits are available that will tap to the bot- 
tom of a pilot hole). 

When you draw a threaded hole, always show the untapped por- 
tion of the pilot hole as illustrated in Figure 12-12, The pilot hole 
usually extends the equivalent of two thread lengths beyond the tapped 
portion of the hole. For example, if we wish to draw a threaded hole in 
which the thread depth is to be 3 and the thread type is to be 1-8UNC-2, 
we would first calculate the depth of one thread by using Equation 
(12-1): 



P = 



Number of threads per inch 

1_ 
" 8 

P = 0.125 

2P = 0.250 

See Figure 12-13 for an example of this. 

We would then calculate the depth of the pilot hole by adding the 

total length of the thread to the equivalent of two thread lengths. 

total thread length + 2P = pilot drill depth 

(12-Z) 
3.000 + 0.250 = pilot drill depth 



1.00 



3.25 



3,00 



*\ 



W 






-4J 

-J 





Figure 12-13 An orthographic view, a 
sectional view using the simplified repre- 
sentation, and a sectional view using the 
schematic representation of a 1-8UNC-2 
X 3 thread. 



256 



Sec. 1 2-8 



Threaded Holes 



257 



If we wished to draw a threaded hole with a 3/8-16UNC-2 thread 
cut to a depth of 1.38, the calculations would be as follows: 



From Equation (12-1) 



P = 



1 
16 



P=0.06 

2P = 0.12 

From Equation (12-2) 

1.38 + .12 = pilot drill depth 

1.50 = pilot drill depth 

Figure 12-14 illustrates a threaded hole with a screw assembled 
into it. Note how the bottom of the screw is distinguished from the 
threads by the 45°-chamfers and also note that the threads extend be- 
yond the bottom of the screw. Threads usually extend at least two 
thread lengths beyond the bottom of a screw to prevent the screw from 
bottoming and jamming in the hole. 



a. 



b. 




Bottom edge of screw 



Figure 12-14 A threaded hole with a screw assembled into it. 
(a) orthographic view, (b) simplified representation, (c) schematic 
representation. 



To draw a threaded hole with a fastener assembled in it, calculate 
the thread depth from Equation (12-3) and the pilot hole depth from 
Equation 12-2. 



threaded hole depth = fastener depth + 2P 



(12-3) 



25S 



Fasteners 



Chap. 12 






Length 



H» 



For example, to draw a threaded hole for a 3 / 4 -10UNC-l X 2.50 ma- 
chine screw, first calculate the threaded length by using Equation (12-1). 

10 

P = 0.10 

2P = 0.20 

Calculate the threaded hole depth'by using Equation (12-3). 

threaded hole depth = 2.50 + 0.20 = 2.70 

Finally, calculate the pilot hole depth by using Equation (12-2). 

pilot hole depth = 2.70 + 0.20 = 2.90 

A table of pilot hole diameters for various thread diameters is in- 
cluded in the Appendix. 



12-9 DRAWING BOLT AND 
SCREW HEADS 

Figure 12-15 illustrates how to draw a hex head bolt. The proce- 
dure used is as follows : 



& 4> & 4> fk 




&-, III 



¥ 



d. 



Figure 12-15 How to draw a hex head bolt. 



(a) Define the diameter and length of the bolt. 

(b) Draw a circle of IV2D diameter as shown. Draw a line parallel 
to the top of the bolt shank as a distance 2/3D as shown. 
Note: The term 1V6D means one and one half times the di- 
ameter. Similarly, the 2/3D. If, for example, the diameter of 
the bolt were l A, 1V£D would equal 



,l n 3 A\ 3 



Sec. 12-9 



Drawing Bolt and Screw Heads 



2S9 



2/3D would equal 



(c) 
(d) 
(e) 



(f) 



(g) 



3 3 \2/ 



Circumscribe a hexagon around the IVfcD circle. 
Project the hexagon's comers as shown. 
Draw a line 60° to the horizontal through the intersection of 
the outside corner projection line and 2/3D line created in 
step (b) such that it crosses the center line of the bolt. Do the 
same for the other corner intersection. Label the intersection 
of the two 60°-lines point 1. 

Draw a 60°-line through each of the intersections of the in- 
side projection lines and the 2/3D line created in step (b). 
Label the intersections of these 60° -lines with those created 
in step (e) points 2. 

Using point 1 and both points 2 as compass points, draw arcs 
as shown. Darken in the appropriate lines and add the desired 
thread notation. 



Figure 12-16 illustrates how to draw a square head bolt. The pro- 
cedure used is as follows : 



Length 



«*■ 



**1 



^ 






£*% 



CD 



to. c. d. 

Figure 12-16 How to draw a square head bolt. 



f. 



(a) 
(b) 

(c) 
(d) 
(e) 



(f) 



Define the diameter and length of the bolt. 

Draw a circle of IV2D diameter as shown. Draw a line parallel 

to the top of the bolt shank at a distance 2/3D as shown. 

Circumscribe a square around the IV2D circle. 

Project the square's corners as shown. 

Draw 60°-lines through the intersection of the projection 

lines drawn in step (d) with the 2/3D line drawn in step (b). 

Label the two intersections of the 60° -lines points 1. 

Using the points 1 as compass centers, draw in the arcs as 

shown. Darken in the appropriate lines and add the desired 

thread notation. 



26Q 



Fasteners 



Chap. 12 




a. b. 

Figure 12-17 How to draw hex and square nuts. 



Nuts are drawn by using the same procedures as for bolt heads ex- 
cept that they are 7/8D high instead of 2/3D high. Figure 12-17 il- 
lustrates a hex and square nut. 



12-10 RIVETS 

Rivets are metal fasteners that are commonly used to hold sheet 
metal parts together. Although they are inexpensive and light weight, 
they are not as strong as screws or bolts. Rivets are not reusable and 
once they are placed in an assembly, they can only be removed by 

drilling. 

Figure 12-18 illustrates two of the many representations used to 
call out rivets on a drawing. The detailed representation in the top view 
consists of circles with diameters equal to the diameter of the rivet's 
head. The side view is as shown. In the top view the schematic represen- 
tation consists of short, perpendicularly crossed lines that locate the 
center of the rivet. The side view looks like a center line of a hole, 
except that it always ends with a short line. 



Detailed 



Schematic 



ran 




Figure 12-18 Rivet representations. 



Sec. 12-11 



Welds 



261 



The meaning of the call outs for schematic representations is 
illustrated in Figure 12-19. The actual identification letter designa- 
tions (BJ, CX, HY, and so on) vary from company to company, al- 
though most aircraft companies use the National Aircraft Standards 
(NAS). 



*« 



& 



& 



\* 



\ 



&* 



A«* 



& 



BJ 4 



Figure 12-19 The meaning of schematic representation rivet 
callouts. 



A long row of rivets, provided that the rivets are all exactly the 
same kind, may be called out by calling out only the first and last rivet 
in the row. Figure 12-20 illustrates this kind of rivet call out. 




Figure 12-20 How to call out rows of rivets. 



12-11 WELDS 



Welds are usually called out on a drawing by notes such as shown 
in Figure 12-21. There are many different welds. Interested students 
are referred to the American Welding Society, 2501 N.W. 7th St., Miami, 
Florida 33125. 




J 



A* 



A^ 



^ 



*° 



& 



^ 



nL 



T< 



>+ 



'« 



M 



°r 



"•/» 



1—, 







■ SPOT WELD 




Figure 12-21 Weld call outs per standards set by the American 
Welding Society. 



PROBLEMS 

Redraw the following and add the appropriate fasteners. Use the 
representation specified by your instructor. Each square on the grid 
pattern is 0.20 per side. 
12-1 




262 



Problems 



263 



12-2 



-|-16UNC-2Axll-HEX HEAD BOLTS 



Thread is ~ long 




12-3 



■ 


r t j r 








JfcJ JL 




^.f — ^^^BlB2-LtL:^p 








^ 7 I1ECJD3JI 




^ f 


**" 


t 


-J'** 


A 


I3EHZ" > s dC u 


t 


^t 




*s 




aCifia — U . 

































12-4 





1 : T1 1 


i - s;:ai«£.'2^S.3- IJ\1 HEjiiL-iJL'JJtftl I 


1 V-^' ° 


1 


^ 




\ 


t "V "' "' 




v J „ 


__3 , 














' 






- ■ 1 _L 



264 



Fasteners 



Chap. 12 



12-5 Redraw the following sectional view and add the following 
fasteners: 

(a) 5/16-18UNC-2A X 1.25 hex head bolt 

(b) 7/16-14UNC-2A X 1.38 square head bolt 

(c) #10 (.190)-32UNF-3A X 1.50 hex head bolt 

(d) 9/16-18UNF-3A X 1.00 square head bolt 




12-6 The shop complains that the following fastener call outs are in- 
correct because the heads interfere, that is, bump into one another. 
Prepare a layout to verify if this is true. If it is true, how would 
you alleviate the interference? 



^-14 UNC-2AX1-1- HEX HEAD 



^-14UNC-2Axl-£- 



16 



FILLISTER 
HEAD 




Problems 



265 



12-7 Redraw the following figure and add the appropriate rivet call 
outs. Make the end rivets of each row (first and last rivet) BJ6s 
and all other rivets BJ4s. 




32*4 * 4 

AL ANGLE 



16GAGE AL 
(.06 THK) 



METRICS 



13 




Figure 13-0 Photograph courtesy of Volkswagen werk, Wolfsburg, 
Germany 



13-1 INTRODUCTION 

Many large corporations, both in the United States and in other 
countries, are multinational corporations. They operate plants, buy 
goods, and sell products in many countries. Olivetti-Underwood, for 
example, is an Italian company headquartered in Ivrea, Italy, but it owns 
and operates manufacturing plants in Spain, the United Kingdom, the 
United States, Argentina, Brazil, Colombia, and Mexico, and it sells 
its products worldwide. 

Because so many companies operate internationally, engineers 
and draftsmen must be prepared to exchange technical information 
internationally. This may be difficult, not only because of the language 
differences, but also because of the different systems used to measure 
and present technical information. In the United States we use the 
English system of measuring (feet and inches) and third angle projec- 
tions for presenting orthographic views. Most other countries use 
the metric system of measuring (meters and millimeters) and first 
angle projections for presenting orthographic views. 

Because the metric system is easier to use than the English system, 
all major nonmetric countries have started to change their engineering 
measuring systems to the metric system, but the change has not yet 
been completed. In the United States the change has been slow, 
primarily because of the enormous costs involved in replacing existing 
nonmetric tools and machinery. Until the metric system becomes 
universal, it is important that draftsmen know how to work comfortably 
in both systems. This chapter will explain the metric system and first 
angle projection and then it will compare them with the English system 
and third angle projection. 



13-2 THE METRIC SYSTEM 

In the metric system measurements of length are based on a fixed 
unit of distance called a meter. A meter is slightly longer than a yard. 
A meter is divided into smaller units called centimeters and millimeters. 
There are 100 centimeters or 1000 millimeters to a meter. Most me- 
chanical measurements in the metric system are made by using milli- 
meters just as most mechanical measurements in the English system are 
made by using inches. 

The symbol for a millimeter is mm (5 mm, 26 mm, and so on). 
Figure 13-1 shows a millimeter scale along with a few sample measure- 
ments. 

To convert a given millimeter value to meters, divide the given 
value by 1000, which is the same as shifting the decimal point three 



267 



268 



Metrics 



Chap. 13 



51 



29 



T6 



10 



mm 






1 234 



6789 



TT 



TITT 



1 
(10) 



Figure 13-1 A millimeter scale with some sample measurements. 

places to the left. For example, 

423 mm = how many meters? 
423 



1000 



■ .423 m 



To convert a given meter value to millimeters, multiply the given 
value by 1000, which is the same as shifting the decimal point three 
places to the right. For example, 

5.1 m = how many millimeters? 

(5.1)(1000) = 5100 mm 

All intermetric distance conversions are accomplished in a similar 
manner. Remember that there are 10 millimeters to 1 centimeter, 100 
centimeters to 1 meter, and 1000 millimeters to 1 meter. 



13-3 CONVERSION BETWEEN 
MEASURING SYSTEMS 

To convert millimeters to inches or inches to millimeters, use the 
following equality: 

25.4 mm - 1 inch 

If you are given a value in millimeters and wish to convert it to an inch 
value, divide the millimeter value by 25.4. For example, 

354 mm = how many inches? 

354 



25.4 



= 13.94 inches 



* * * 



Sec. 13-4 Conversion Tables 269 

10 mm = how many inches? 
10 



25.4 



= 0.394 inch 



If you are given a value in inches and wish to convert it to a millimeter 
value, multiply the inch value by 25.4. For example, 

3.20 inches = how many millimeters? 

(3.20)(25.4) = 81.28 mm 

* * * 

0.68 inch = how many millimeters? 
(0.68)(25.4) = 17.27 mm 

If you are given a fractional inch value and wish to change it to a milli- 
meter value, you must first change the fractional value to its decimal 
equivalent in inches and then multiply the decimal value by 25.4. For 
example, 

7 
6— inches = how many millimeters? 
8 

7 
6— inches = 6.88 inches 

o 

(6.88)(25.4) = 174,75 mm 

* * * 



9 

— inch = how many millimeters? 
16 

9 

— — inch = . 56 inches 
16 

(.56)(25.4) = 14.22 mm 



13-4 CONVERSION TABLES 

This section contains two conversion tables: one for converting 
inches to millimeters (Table 13-1), and one for converting millimeters 
to inches (Table 13-2). Conversion tables enable you to convert given 
values directly without having to go through extensive calculations. The 
tables, however, are limited and any values not included in them must 
be converted mathematically. 

To use the inches to millimeters table, break the given value into 
its whole number, tenths, hundredths, and thousandths values and 



Whole Numbers 


Ten 


ths 


Hundreds 


Thousands 


in 


mm 


in 


mm 


in 


mm 


in 


mm 


1 


25.4 


.1 


2.54 


.01 


.254 


.001 


.02 54 


2 


50.8 


.2 


5.08 


.02 


.508 


.002 


.0508 


3 


(0.<£. 


.3 


7.62 


.03 


.762 


.003 


.0762 


4 


101.6 


.** 


10.16 


.04 


1.016 


.004 


,1016 


5 


127.0 


.5 


12.70 


.05 


1.270 


.005 


.12 70 


6 


152.4 


.6 


15.24 


.06 


1.524 


.006 


.1524 


7 


177.8 


.7 


17.78 


.07 


t.7?8 


.007 


.1778 


8 


203.2 


.8 


20.32 


.08 


2.032 


.008 


.ZU32 


9 


228.6 


.9 


22.86 


.09 


2.2 86 


.009 


.2286 


i0 


254.0 


1.0 


25.40 


.10 


2.540 


.010 


.2 540 


"fl 


279.4 








12 


304.8 


13 


330.2 


14 


355.6 


15 


381.0 


16 


406.4 


\7 


431.8 


18 


457.2 


19 


482.6 


20 


508.0 


21 


533.4 


22 


558.8 


23 


584.2 


24 


o09,6 







Table 13-1 Inches to millimeters. 



mm 


in 


mm 


in 


mm 


in 


mm 


in 


! 


.039 


26 


1.024 


51 


2.008 


76 


2.992 


2 


079 


27 


1.063 


52 


2.047 


77 


3.032 


3 


.118 


28 


1.102 


53 


2j087 


78 


3.071 


4 


.158 


29 


1.141 


54 


2.1 26 


79 


3.110 


5 


.197 


30 


1.181 


55 


2,165 


80 


3.150 


6 


.236 


31 


1.221 


56 


2.205 


81 


3.189 


7 


.276 


32 


1.260 


57 


2.244 


82 


3,228 


8 


.315 


33 


1.300 


58 


2-284 


83 


3.268 


9 


.354 


34 


1.339 


59 


2.323 


84 


3.307 


10 


.394 


35 


1.378 


60 


2.362 


85 


3.347 


11 


.433 


36 


1.417 


61 


2.402 


86 


3.386 


12 


.472 


37 


1.457 


62 


2.441 


87 


3.425 


13 


.512 


38 


1.496 


63 


2.480 


88 


3.464 


14 


.551 


39 


1.535 


64 


2.520 


89 


3.504 


15 


.591 


40 


1.575 


65 


2.559 


90 


3.543 


16 


.630 


41 


1.614 


66 


2.598 


91 


3.583 


17 


.669 


42 


1.653 


57 


2,638 


92 


3.622 


18 


709 


43 


1.693 


68 


2,677 


93 


3.661 


19 


,748 


44 


1.732 


69 


2.717 


94 


3.701 


20 


.787 


45 


1.772 


70 


2.756 


95 


3.740 


21 


.827 


46 


1.811 


71 


2.795 


96 


3.780 


22 


.866 


47 


1.850 


72 


2.835 


97 


3.818 


23 


.906 


48 


1.890 


73 


2.874 


98 


3.858 


24 


.945 


49 


1.929 


74 


2.913 


99 


3.898 


25 


.984 


50 


1.969 


75 


2.953 


100 


3.937 



mm 


in 


mm 


in 


100 


3.937 


600 


23.622 


200 


7.874 


700 


27.559 


300 


11.811 


800 


31.496 


400 


15.748 


900 


35.433 


500 


19.685 


1000 


39.370 



Table 13-2 Millimeters to inches, 



270 



Sec. 13-4 



Conversion Tables 



271 



convert each separately. Then add the individual values together to 
form a final equivalence value. For example, 

Given 3.472 inches 

How many millimeters is this equal to? 



Whole number value 3.000 = 76.2000 

Tenths value 0.400 = 10.1600 

Hundredths value 0.070 = 1.7780 

Thousandths value 0.002 = 0.0508 

88.1888 



Values 
from 
Table 13-1 



Therefore^ 

3.472 inches = 88.1888 mm, or approximately 88 mm 

Table 13-1 is only good for decimal values. Fractional values 
must be converted to decimal equivalents before they may be con- 
verted into millimeters. For example, 



Given — inch 
8 



How many millimeters is this equal to? 



— inch = 0.375 

o 



Whole number value 0.000 

Tenths value 0.300 

Hundredths value 0.070 

Thousandths value 0.005 



0.0000 
7.6200 
1.7780 
0.1270 

9.525 



Values 
from 
Table 13-1 



Therefore, 



— inch = 9.525 mm 

8 

To use the millimeters to inches table (Table 13-2), simply look 
up the value in the table. Fractions of a millimeter are not included. If 
a fractional millimeter value is required, use the relationship 1 inch = 
25.4 mm and calculate the value as shown in Section 13-3. For values 
greater than 100 mm, look up the hundredths value in the hundredths 
value table and look up the tenths and units values in the main part of 
the table; then add the results to form a final equivalent value. For 
example, 



537 mm = how many inches? 

500 mm = 19.685 
37 mm = 1.457 

21.142 



Values 
from 
Table 13-2 



537 mm = 21.142 inches 



272 



Metrics 



Chap. 13 



13-5 FIRST ANGLE PROJECTIONS 

Not only do many foreign countries use a different measuring 
standard than is used in the United States, they also use a different 
projection system for presenting orthographic views. The United States 
uses what is called third angle projection, but many other countries use 
first angle projection. Figure 13-2 illustrates the differences in the two 
systems by showing the same object drawn in each. By comparing the 
two drawings shown in Figure 13-2, we see that the front views in each 
system are exactly the same. The top views also appear to be the same 
although they are located differently relative to the front view. If you 
are familiar with third angle projections, you will know that the top 
view of a first angle projection appears to be located where the bottom 
view should be. This apparent reversal of locations comes about because 
of the way the views are taken. In third angle projection the viewer 
looks at the object. In first angle projection the viewer looks through 
the object. 

To clarify this concept, study the right side view of the third angle 
projection and the left end view of the first angle projection. In the 
third angle projection the right side view is a view taken from the right 




1 




2 










4 




Top 












3 








14 




3,2 




3,4 




1,2 


















Fr 


ont 






Right 
Side 


















THIRD Angle Projection 



FIRST Angle Projection 



Figure 13-2 A comparison between first and third angle projec- 
tions of the same object. 






































1 

1 
I 




" T ~ 

r 


- T -«- 

t 

i 






































>* 


s 
























■ 
1 



















THIRD Angle Projection 



FIRST Angle Projection 



Figure 13-3 A comparison between first and third angle project 
tions of the same object. 



side of the object, looking into the object, and drawn on the same side 
of the object as the viewer. In first angle projection the left end view is 
a view taken from the left side of the object, looking through the ob- 
ject, and drawn on the side of the object opposite the viewer. Figures 
13-3 and 13-4 are two more examples that compare first and third 
angle projections of the same objects. Study them. Look into and look 
through the objects. 



Figure 13-4 A comparison between first and third angle projec- 
tions of the same object. 





1 ■ 





THIRD Angle Projection 



FIRST Angle Projection 



274 



Metrics 



Chap. 13 



From a drawing technique standpoint, the two systems are equally 
demanding. Visible lines must be heavy and black. Visible lines must be 
heavier than dimension lines and hidden lines. Lettering must be neat 
and uniform. The projection theory presented in Chapter 4 is also 
applicable, although the 45°-miter line is located differently (see Figure 
13-2). 



PROBLEMS 



13-1 Convert the following millimeter values into inches: 

a) 20 mm 

b) 4 mm 

c) 327 mm 

d) 526 mm 

e) 103 mm 

f) 57 mm 

g) 5384 mm 
h) 910 mm 
i) 38 mm 

j) 237 mm 

13-2 Convert the following inch values into millimeters: 

a) 2.378" 

b) 0.750" 

c) 12.875" 

d) 0.020" 

e) 1.006" 

f) 4.125" 

g) 3.500" 
h) 120.000" 
i) 8.820" 

j) 1.324" 

13-3 Convert the following inch values into millimeters: 

a) 1/2" 

b) 2-1/4" 

c) 3-7/8" 

d) 12-5/16" 

e) 5-13/32" 

Your company has purchased the rights to produce some parts which 
up to now have been produced only in Europe. As part of the agree- 
ment, the European producer has supplied manufacturing drawings of 
the parts involved. Convert these drawings, done in millimeters and first 
angle projection, into drawings that may be read by American crafts- 
men (decimal inches and third angle projections). 

13-4 



r— 25 



50R 




IQDIA 



13-5 




40 




110 



13-6 



12DIA-4PLACES 



34DIA 




80D1A 



13-7 




400IA 



15 



33 



55 *- 



75 H 



275 



276 

13-8 



Metrics 



Chap. 13 



H 40— H 





13-9 



45 



28 - 1 - 

1 1* 












t 






t * 5 






1 


30 


15 k«- 
-«-30 ■*" 


55 — *■ 
— 80 






— 20 


^ 


. »- 





Problems 



277 



Your company has decided to manufacture the following parts in a 
European plant. In order to do this, the manufacturing drawings must 
be converted into the European system of millimeters and first angle 
projections. Convert the following drawings so that they may be read 
by European craftsmen: 

13-10 



1.00 



T 

1.75 



1.00 1 



\ ,38 



4.00 



■* 2.00 H 



i J ' 



T 

1.38 



ir k 



-75 



.38 



i 
t 
I i 



13-11 




278 

13-12 



Metrics 



Chap. 13 



2.00 










I 

! 

I 


1 

! 

1 











13-13 



1.63 R 



1.50 DIA 



1.13 Dl A 




.25DRILL-.50SFACE 



j> 



.53 \ 



-^.50 



4.25 DIA 



<s. 



FILLETS AND ROUNDS g-R 



PRODUCTION 
DRAWINGS 



14 




Figure 14-0 Illustration courtesy of Teledyne Post, Des Plaines, 
Illinois 60016. 



14-1 INTRODUCTION 

Production drawings are used to aid a craftsman in the manufac- 
turing of an object. They are generally either detail drawings or assembly 
drawings. A detail drawing usually presents only one object. An assem- 
bly drawing presents several objects together. 

It is sometimes difficult to realize that the picture portion of a 
drawing is only one part of the total finished drawing. The title block, 
revision block, and drawing notes are just as important as the picture 
portion, and often they are just as time-consuming to prepare. This 
chapter will briefly describe title blocks, revision blocks, and so on, and 
will explain more specifically the makeup of detail and assembly draw- 

This chapter will also present the concept of using fewer than 
three orthographic views to describe an object. It will explain drawing 
scales, drawing details, and several common drawing call outs. 



14-2 ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS 

Assembly drawings show several objects joined together. An as- 
sembly drawing must include all information needed by the craftsman 
to correctly assemble the parts. They do not usually include specific 
object dimensions, but they do include those dimensions which are 
necessary for assembly. 

Figure 14-1 illustrates an assembly drawing. Each object is identi- 
fied by part number, but it is not dimensioned. Hidden lines have been 
omitted to make the drawing easier to read. This is not always possible, 
especially for assemblies that contain internal parts. 

If any specific operation is to be performed by the assembler, it 
must be noted on the assembly drawing. For example, if several parts 
are to be joined together by a bolt, the bolt hole should, if possible, be 
drilled during the parts assembly to insure that all the parts align prop- 
erly. 

Assembly drawings sometimes reassign new part numbers to the 
various component pieces that make up the assembly. Assembly num- 
bers are usually one or two digit numbers (1, 2, 3, 14, 22, etc.) and are 
added to save printing the larger, more complicated part numbers on 
the assembly drawing. If assembly numbers are used, include them in a 
column in the parts list next to and to the left of the part numbers. 
Label the column Assy No. 



280 



Sec. 14-2 



Assembly Drawings 



281 






ffl 












01 

< 
u 






CO 

1 
0) 


I 

u_ 




5 

UJ 

a 


EC 
UJ 

> 
o 
o 


UJ 

-) 
a. 

UJ 

to 

3 


z 
o 

o 

V) 
UJ 

Q 


1— 

O 

H 


a: 
a 




hi 


UE SCREWS 


> 
_l 

ac 2 
O uj 

a. co 

3 < 
0) 






(M 


- 


•- 


>- 

a 


UJ 


CE 

o 

1- 


c c » 
<* 

o g* 


O 

z 




< 

I— 

to 


m 
in 

CD 


w 

It 


o 

z 

tr 

5 























g 




X 

s 

< 



I 

r-l 

i 



282 



Production Drawings 



Chap. 14 



14-3 DETAIL DRAWINGS 

Detail drawings are used by craftsmen to produce a finished object. 
They are a set of instructions that should include all information neces- 
sary for the complete and accurate manufacture of the object. They 
should include, among other things, a complete size and shape defini- 
tion of the object; the material from which the object is to be made; all 
necessary information on treatment of the materials; surface finish 
requirements; references to applicable company, customer, or govern- 
ment specifications; any necessary inspection information; and, if 
necessary, instructions for handling the finished object. Figure 14-2 
illustrates a detail drawing. 




MAKE FROM: 4050 CARBON STEEL 



NEXT ASSY: 34762 



TOLERANCES 

.XX *-.01 
.XXX ±003 
Angular ± 1° 



REVISIONS 



NO | BY | CHANGjfsT 



[JOB 
0*644 



CHAMFER WAS .31x45 



NOTE 



PACKAGE PER SPEC 34A 



OLD AMALGAMATED 

11 QUARRY TERRACE 
PEABOOY.MASS 01960 



on ov 



■0- 



CHK ,£*- 



EN6 4g 



DATEA-Mi 



SCALEiftf 



CUST 



P0ST-78T442 



Figure 14-2 An example of a detail drawing. 



14-4 TITLE BLOCKS 



The title block of a drawing contains the title of the object, the 
part number, the company name and address, and signatures of the 
engineers and draftsmen who prepared the drawing. It may also include 
customer order numbers, tolerance specifications, signature blocks (for 
various approval signatures), and the drawing scale. Figure 14-3 illus- 
trates a title block. 

Title blocks are usually located in the lower right-hand corner 
of the drawing. 



Sec. 14-6 



Revision Blocks 



283 



TOLERANCES ON MACHINE OIMENSIONS 
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED 


FRACTIONAL DIMENSIONS 


- V32 


ANGULAR DIMENSIONS 


■ 1/2- 


SURFACE FINISHES 


125 V 


ALL CORNERS 1/32 R OR CHAM 
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED 





DRAWN 


SCALE 


APP'V'D 


B/M 


DATE 


PATT. 




ATWOOD & MORRILL CO. 

SALEM, MASS. 







Figure 14-3 A company title block courtesy of the Atwood and 
Morrill Co., Salem, Mass. 



14-5 PARTS LIST 

A parts list is a listing of the names and numbers of parts called 
out on the drawing. It may also include material information, stock 
size, manufacturing quantity, finishing specifications, weight calcula- 
tions, and so on. Figure 14-4 illustrates a parts list. 













5QZS-0Z 


3 


CUP 


.Q(>*/.$x6.C 


7075-m 


SQIS-O/ 


/ 


BRfrCKLT 


2*t>*&0 


STL 


PART NO 


QTY 


DESCRIPTION 


STOCK SIZE 


MATL 



Figure 14-4 An example of a parts list. 



14-6 REVISION BLOCKS 

A revision block is a listing of all changes that have been made 
in the drawing. It should include a description of the change, the date 
the change was made, where the change is located on the drawing, the 
draftsman's initials, and any necessary approval signatures. 

Revision blocks are usually located in the upper right-hand corner 
of the drawing. Figure 14-5 illustrates a revision block. 



Figure 14-5 An example of a revision block. 







REVISIONS 




NO 


av 


CHANCE 




/ 




ffATL UAS C.K3TUL 




u 
















-■— 



284 Production Drawings 

14-7 DRAWING ZONES 



Chap. 14 



Large drawings are divided into zones similar to those used on a 
map. Letters are used to define the horizontal zones and numbers are 
used to define the vertical zones. Figure 14-6 illustrates a zoned draw- 
ing. 



<£<? 




Figure 14-6 An example of a zoned drawing. 



Zone number are usually written in boxes with the letter over the 
number as follows: 



C/4, D/2, A/13 



etc. 



14-8 DRAWING NOTES 

Drawing notes are written instructions that are included as part of 
a drawing. They are written because they cannot be drawn (for example, 
heat treating or finishing instructions). Figure 14-1 includes a note 
that defines the torquing requirements of the assembly. 



14-9 ONE-, TWO-, AND PARTIAL 
VIEW DRAWINGS 

Up to this point we have shown three views of every object. Three 
views are not always necessary for complete definition of an object and 
in some cases two views are sufficient. Occasionally, just one view is 
enough. Figure 14-7 is an example of a two-view drawing. Figure 14-8 
is an example of a one-view drawing. In both figures the objects are 
completely defined and require no other orthographic views. 






Sec. 14-9 



One-, Two-, and Partial View Drawings 



285 



±_r 

-. 



A** 



s«a» 











r 

! 

i 


I 

I 

i 




Figure 14-7 An example of a two-view drawing. In this case, the 
side view adds nothing to the drawing and so can be eliminated. 




<$£ 



MAKE FROM -| CRS 



Figure 14-8 An example where one view is sufficient to define 
the object. 



Unfortunately, there is no rule to follow in determining the num- 
ber of views needed. Each object must be judged separately according 
to its individual drawing requirements. 

For some objects, one orthographic view and part of another are 
sufficient for complete definition. A view that includes only part of an 
orthographic view is called a. partial view. When and where to use partial 
views is up to the discretion of the draftsman, as long as the final 
drawing completely defines the object. Figure 14-9 is an example of 
a drawing that includes partial views. 

To show where a partial view has been broken off (the rest of the 
view has been omitted), use a break line. Two kinds of break lines are 
used— one for general use and one when break lines are very long. 
Figure 14-10 illustrates the two break lines. Figure 14-11 presents an 



286 



Production Drawings 



Chap. 14 




Figure 14-9 An example of a drawing which includes partial 
views. 



BREAK LINES 



for Shorter Breaks 



(thick) 



for Long Breaks 

V — 



j r 



(thin) 



Figure 14-10 How to draw breaklines. The wavy line used for 
shorter breaks is drawn freehand whereas the line for longer breaks 
is drawn as shown. 



— eb ^— <+) — -<*) (+) $jh* 

I — ^ ^ 1 

6.74 

r Y~ V 1 



-<^-4> — $ — ^— § — ^- . 



Figure 14-11 An example which includes a long break line. 



Sec. 14-11 



Drawing Scales 



287 



example of how the long break line is used and Figure 14-9 illustrates 
the general break line. General break lines are drawn freehand as shown 
in Figure 14-10. 



14-10 A DRAWING DETAIL 

A drawing detail is a special kind of partial drawing. It is used to 
enlarge a specific part of a drawing that is too small or too complicated 
to be completely understood if only shown in its existing size. Figure 
14-12 is an example of a drawing that includes a drawing detail. 

When you draw a drawing detail, always clearly state the scale 
used and always label both the detail and the original source of the de- 
tail. As with one-view, two-view, and other partial drawings, there is no 
rule on when a drawing detail should be used. It is up to the draftsman 
to judge his (or her) drawing and to determine whether or not a draw- 
ing detail will help clarify any particular area. 




SEE DETAIL A 



I— -1.25-^| 









— *- 
.25 

■ 


— .50 












/> 






1 " 


t \ 






Wr 




DE 


■TAI 


L 


A 



^75 



SCALE 2-1 



Figure 14-12 An example of a drawing detail. 



14-11 DRAWING SCALES 



Drawing scales are used because some objects are too big to fit on 
a sheet of drawing paper and others are so small that they could not be 
seen on a drawing. House drawings, for example, are drawn at a reduced 
scale. Electronic microcircuits are drawn at an increased scale. 

Figure 14-13 shows one full-sized and two scaled drawings of the 
same square. Note that the scale used is clearly defined. 

The scale note l A = 1 means that every Vfc inch on the drawing is 
actually 1 inch on the object. In other words, the drawing is one-half 
the size of the true object size. Similarly, the scale note 2 = 1 means 





\ : 








2 








t 


-m — 


*- 


2 



SCALE: 2-1 



SCALE: 1-1 



SCALE:4- = 1 



. 1 _. 



Figure 14-13 An example of drawing scales. The same square 
has been drawn using three different scales. 



that 2 inch equals 1 inch; thus, the drawing is twice as large as the actu- 
al object. The note 1 = 1 means that the drawing is the exact same size 
as the object. 

When you dimension scaled drawings, never change the stated 
dimensions. Only change the size of the picture portion of the draw- 
ing. Look again at Figure 14-13. Note that the object has the same 
dimensions in each scale despite the change in the drawn size of the 
object. 



14-12 DRILLING, REAMING, 
COUNTERBORING, AND 
COUNTERSINKING 

Drilling, reaming, counterboring, and countersinking are very com- 
mon machining operations that are called for on a drawing by a drawing 
note. Each operation is defined in this section and is illustrated in 
Figure 14-14. 

DRILLING: a machine operation that produces holes. The bottom of 
drilled holes are drawn to a 30° -tapered point as shown in Figure 
14-1 4(a). 

REAMING: a machine operation that smooths out the surface of a 
drilled hole. From a drawing standpoint, reamings are drawn the same 
way that drilled holes are drawn. The call out notes, however, are 
different as shown in Figure 14-14(b). 

COUNTERBORING: a machine operation in which part of a drilled 
hole is redrilled to a larger diameter [see Figure 14-14(c)]. 
COUNTERSINKING: a machine operation in which a drilled hole is 
redrilled to produce the tapered shape as shown in Figure 14-14(d).^ 
Countersinks are usually made at 82°, but they may be drawn at 90° 
(45° on each side) as shown in Figure 14-14(d). 



238 





md»p ©joqo — s_j ut_ 










Mldsp UNO 



■a * 
-^ 

"Si 

« a 

.Sort 

3"8.s 
.2 S * 

J AT] 
"o *J *J 

C C at 
« 3 "E 
^ ft 

C °8 

S " ft 

ft WJ3 

1 g * 

"* 3iJ 
rt «o 
s * 
3 «* 
&— c 

££g 




M»jA dox 



M«jA JUOJJ 



M»|A |euoi|3«s 



289 



290 



Production Drawings 



Chap. 14 



PROBLEMS 

14-1 Redraw the following assembly. Make any changes that you feel 
will help clarify the drawing. Also draw detailed drawings of 
each of the component pieces of the assembly (including the 
screws). Each square on the grid is 0.20 per side. 




■ 



14-2 Redraw the following object and add the appropriate notes. 




Problem Si 



291 



14-3 Redraw the following object and add the following: 

a) 0.44 DRILL-0.88 DEEP 

b) 0.31 DIA-0.56 C BORE 
0.19 DEEP 

c) 0.63 DIA-82° CSK 
1.38 DIA 

d) 0.499-0.501 REAM 



1.50 



L_L 



100 



— 2.00 * 



+" 



S75 



•* 2.00 



+° 



2.00 



+ C 



+° 



r 

2.00 

I 



|— 



8.00 



292 



Production Drawings 



Chap. 14 



14-4 Given the following assembly drawing, prepare detail drawings 
of each of the component parts. Specify thread sizes for each of 
the screws. Assume that there are six screws between the base 
plate and body and six screws between the cover casting and 
body. Each square on the grid pattern is 1/8 per side. 







DESIGN PROBLEMS 

For each of the following designs, prepare an assembly drawing and de- 
tail drawings of each of the components parts, and a parts list. 

14-5 Design a four-shelf bookcase. 

14-6 Design a drawing table. 

14-7 Design a case for carrying all your drafting equipment (do not 

include drafting machines). 
14-8 Prepare a detail drawing of any standard tool (hammer, wrench, 

etc.). 



Problems 



293 



14-9 Prepare an assembly drawing and detail drawings of each of the 
component parts of a ball -point pen or leadh older. 

14-10 Design a wine rack. Allow for bottles of at least three different 
sizes. 

14-11 Design a portable, removable food tray for use while eating in a 
car. Specify the make of car for which you are designing the 
tray. 

14-12 Given the following exploded drawing of a holding fixture and 
details of each of the fixture's component parts, draw a com- 
plete assembly drawing of the fixture. Use whatever views 
(orthographic, sectional, etc.) are necessary for complete defini- 
tion of how all the pieces are to be assembled. Add a note to the 
assembly drawing to have the latch pin, dowel pins, cam pivot 
pin, and cover pivot pin peined after assembly. Also add a parts 
list to the assembly drawing which includes a complete listing of 
parts required for the assembly. 




1.25 



.125 



Latch 



.19 



Holder Cam 




294 

14-12b 

r— ,250 Dirt 



Production Drawings 



Chap. 14 



EEE 



Dowflt Pin 



f£ 



L-.S23 OiA 



2SOIA 



Larfl* Buahlng 



-.11 t>IA 



Pin 
and Cam Pivot 

Pin 



][ 

T 



J-40 UNC-ZA 

I 



.65 



.310 



-d" r 






1ft OIA 



Small Bbahlng 



=f 



Z^3-ei3--0- 



I — .125 DIA Cover Pivot Pin 



14-12c 



3.00 




.25R 



Cover Plate 



Problems 



295 



14-12d 



Cover 
Pivot Pin 




Base Casting 



14-12e 




-J- 20UNC-2BX.38, 
2 PLACES 



jj 40UNC-2B\38 



{ ^--i40UNC-2B 
8 x.38 r 



-25 



| 



?ii! nrtr^ 



■"ii w rm 



•M 



"i| L l 1-63 



.38 



n 



.75 



Base 
Casting 



50 



ISOMETRIC 
DRAWINGS 



15 




Figure 15-0 Photograph courtesy of Buick Division, General 
Motors Corp. 



15-1 INTRODUCTION 

Isometric drawings are technical pictures that can be drawn by using 
instruments. They are not esthetically perfect pictures because their 
axes do not taper as they approach infinity. Figure 15-1 shows a 
comparison between an isometric drawing of a rectangular box and a 
pictorial drawing (such as an artist would draw) of the same object, 
and it demonstrates the distortion inherent in isometric drawings. Note 
how the back corner of the isometric appears much larger that the back 
of the pictorial drawing. Despite this slight distortion, isometric draw- 
ings are a valuable way to convey technical information. 




Pictorial 



Isometric 




Figure 15-1 A comparison between an isometric drawing and a 
pictorial drawing. Note the visual distortion of the top rear 
comer of the isometric drawing. 



The basic reference system for isometric drawings is shown in 
Figure 15-2. The three lines are 120° apart and may be thought of as 
a vertical line and two lines 30° to the horizontal, which means that 
they may be drawn by using a 30-60-90 triangle supported by a T- 
square. All isometric drawings are based on this axis system. 

Normally, an isometric drawing is positioned so that the front, 
top, and right side views appear as shown in Figure 15-3. This may be 



297 




Figure 15-2 The basic reference system for isometric drawings. 




Fiffure 15-3 Definition of the relationship between the front, 
top? and side views as drawn orthographical and isometncally. 



varied according to the position that the draftsman feels best shows 

the object. . , 

Dimensional values are transferable from orthographic views only 
to the axis, or lines parallel to the axis, of isometric drawings. Angles 
and inclined dimensional values are not directly transferable and require 
special supplementary layouts which will be explained in this chapter. 



298 



Sec. 15-2 



Normal Surfaces 



299 



Isometric drawings do not normally include hidden lines, although 
hidden lines may be drawn if special emphasis of a hidden surface is 
required. 



15-2 NORMAL SURFACES 

Figure 15-4 is a sample problem that requires you to create an 
isometric drawing from given orthographic views. Since all surfaces in 
the problem are normal (90° to each other), all dimensional values may 
be transferred directly from the orthographic views to the isometric 
axis, or lines parallel to the isometric axis. The basic height, width, and 
length of the object are VA, 2, and 3, respectively, in both the isometric 



GIVEN: Front, top and side views. 
PROBLEM: Draw an isometric drawing. 



1" 

H 



W 



Figure 15-4 

and orthographic drawings. Figure 15-5 is the solution to Figure 15-4 
and was derived by the following procedure: 

SOLUTION: 

1. Make, to the best of your ability, a freehand sketch of the solu- 
tion. See Section 5-6 for instructions on how to make sketches. 
Remember that since it is easier to make corrections and changes 
on a sketch than on a drawing, you should make your sketch 
as complete and accurate as possible. 



Figure 15-5(a) 




300 



Isometric Drawings 



Chap. 1 5 



Using very light lines, lay out a rectangular box whose height, 
width, and length correspond to the height, width, and length 
given in the orthographic views. 




Figure 15-5(b) 




3. Using very light lines, lay out the specific shape of the object. 
Transfer dimensional values directly from the orthographic 
views to the axis, or lines parallel to the axis, of the isometric 
drawing. 




Figure 15-5(c) 



Figure 15-5{d) 




4. Erase all excess lines and smudges; carefully check your work; 
and then darken in all final lines to their proper color and pat- 
tern. 



Figure 15-5(e) 



Sec. 15-2 



Normal Surfaces 



301 



Figure 15-6 is another example of an isometric drawing created 
from given orthographic views and including only normal surfaces. 



GIVEN: Front, top, and side views. 
PROBLEM: Draw an isometric drawing. 



SOLUTION: 




















1 

1 
_ J 


1 — 

1 





1 
_J 




Figure 15-6(a) 



Figure 15-6(b) 




Figure 15 -6(c) 



Figure 15 -6(d) 




Figure 15-6(e) 



Figure 15-6{fj 




Figure 15 -6(g) 



302 



Isometric Drawings 



Chap. 15 



GIVEN: Front, top, and side views. 
PROBLEM: Draw an isometric drawing. 



15-3 SLANTED AND OBLIQUE 
SURFACES 

Figure 15-7 is a sample problem that involves the creation of an 
isometric drawing from given orthographic views that contain a slanted 
surface. The slanted surface is dimensioned by using an angular dimen- 
sion that presents a problem because angular dimensions cannot be 
directly transferred from orthographic views to isometric drawings. 








Figure 15-7 



To transfer an angular dimensional view from an orthographic 
view to an isometric drawing, convert the angular dimensional value to 
its component linear value and transfer the component values directly 
to the axis of the isometric drawing. Figure 15-8 illustrates this pro- 
cedure by showing two angular dimensions that have been converted 






Figure 15-8 Two examples of angular di- 
mensions which have been redimensioned 
using their linear coordinates. The linear 
coordinates have been transferred to an iso- 
metric axis. 



Sec. 15-3 



Slanted and Oblique Surfaces 



303 



to their respective component linear values and then showing how these 
values are transferred to the isometric axis. Normally, a draftsman 
simply measures his' full-sized orthographic views and then transfers the 
information, but if this information is not available, he (or she) makes a 
supplementary layout from which the necessary values may be measured. 
Supplementary layouts may be made on any extra available paper and 
should be saved for reference during the checking of the drawing. 

Figure 15-9 is the solution to Figure 15-7 and was derived by the 
following procedure: 

SOLUTION: 

1. Make, to the best of your ability, a freehand sketch of the solu- 
tion. 



..v 




Figure 15-9 (a) 



2. Using very light lines, lay out a rectangular box whose height, 
width, and length correspond to the height, width, and length 
given in the orthographic views. 




Figure 15-9(b) 



304 



Isometric Drawings 



Chap. 15 



3. Using very light lines, lay out the specific details of the object. 
Where necessary, make supplementary layouts that furnish the 
linear component values which you can transfer to the isomet- 
ric axis. In this case, the 30° component layout is shown in 
Figure 15-8. 




Figure 15-9(c) 





Figure 15-9(d) 



Figure 15-9(e) 



4. Erase all excess lines and smudges; check your work; and then 
draw in all lines to their proper color and pattern. 



Figure 15-9(f) 




Sec. 15-3 



Slanted and Oblique Surfaces 



305 



Figure 15-10 is a sample problem that requires you to make an 
isometric drawing from given orthographic views that include an oblique 
surface. The solution was derived by using basically the same procedure 
that was used for slanted surfaces. As with angular dimensional values, 
the dimensional values that define an oblique surface must be converted 
to their respective linear component values before they may be trans- 
ferred to the isometric axis. If necessary, supplementary layouts should 
be made. Figure 15-11 is the solution to Figure 15-10. 



GIVEN: Front, top, and side views. 
PROBLEM: Draw an isometric drawing. 



Figure 15-10 




SOLUTION: 





Figure 15-1 1(a) 




Figure 15-1 1(e) 



306 



Isometric Drawings 



Chap. 15 



15-4 HOLES IN ISOMETRIC DRAWINGS 

There are two basic methods for drawing holes for isometric draw- 
ings One method is to use instruments and draw the holes by using the 
four-center ellipse method. The other method is to use an isometric 
hole template as a guide. The template is much easier and faster to use, 
but templates are available only in standard hole sizes. Very large or 
odd-sized holes may only be drawn by using the four-center ellipse 

method- *«-•#*% 

The four-center ellipse method is presented in Figure 15-14(a). 
When you use this method, be careful that the four centers are located 
accurately. If the centers are not located properly, the four individual 
arcs will not meet to form a smooth, continuous ellipse. A good prac- 
tice that will help you draw a smooth continuous ellipse is to lightly 
construct the ellipse and then check it for accuracy before drawing in 

the final heavy arcs. 

An isometric hole template may be conveniently used as a guide 
for drawing the hole size for which it is cut. Figure 15-12(a) illustrates 
an isometric hole template. To align the template for drawing, first 
draw in the hole center lines, and then align the guidelines printed on 
the template adjacent to the desired hole with the center lines on the 
drawing. If you are still unsure of how to position the template, draw 
in the center lines and the major and minor axes of the ellipse as shown 
in Figure 15-12(b). Then align the template with the four intersections 
formed by the center lines as they cross the major and minor axes 
(labeled points 1, 2, 3, and 4 in Figure 15-12) and draw in the ellipse. 



MU» 








Figure 15-12(a) Isometric hole template 



Figure 15-1 2(b) 



Sec. 15-4 



Holes in Isometric Drawings 



307 



GIVEN: Front and side views. 
PROBLEM: Draw an isometric drawing. 





-■ 

















1 

! 

f 


1 

! 

i 




Figure 15-13 

Figure 15-13 is a problem that requires you to draw a hole in an 
isometric drawing. Figure 15-14 is the solution using the four-center 
ellipse method, and Figure 15-15 is the solution using an isometric hole 
template. 



Figure 15-1 4 (a) Four center method for drawing isometric elip- 
ses. Note: this method is ONLY good for isometric drawings; use 
the approximate elipse method described in Section 3-28 for all 
other elipses. 




Indicates the location of compass center points 



308 



Isometric Drawings 



Chap. 15 



SOLUTION: 




Figure 15-14(b) 




Figure 15-14(d) 




Figure 15-1 4(c) 





Figure 15-14(e) 



Figure 15-14(f) 



Holes in Isometric Drawings 




Figure 15-1 5(e) 



310 



Isometric Drawings 



Chap. 15 




Figure 15-16 When does the bottom edge 
of a hole show in an isometric drawing? 



In drawing a hole for an isometric drawing there arises the ques- 
tion of whether or not the bottom edge of the hole can be seen. If it 
can be seen, how much of it can be seen? Figure 15-16 illustrates the 

problem. 

To determine exactly if and how much of the bottom edge of the 
hole should be drawn, locate the center point of the hole on the bot- 
tom surface and draw in the hole by using the same procedure you used 
for the hole on the top surface. If the hole drawn on the bottom sur- 
face appears within the hole on the top surface, it should appear on the 
finished drawing. If the hole drawn on the bottom surface does not ap- 
pear within the hole on the top surface, it should not appear on the 
finished drawing. Figure 15-17 presents a sample problem that illus- 
trates this procedure. 



GIVEN: A front view. 

PROBLEM: Draw an isometric drawing. 





Figure 15 -17 (a) 



Figure 15-1 7(b) 




Figure 15-1 7(c) 




Cantarpoinl for 
Bottom Surfaca 




Figure 15-1 7(d) 



Figure 15-17(e) 



Sec. 15-5 



Round and Irregular Surfaces 



311 



15-5 ROUND AND IRREGULAR 
SURFACES 



Figure 15-18 is a sample problem that requires you to create an 
isometric drawing from given orthographic views that contain a round 
surface. To make an isometric drawing of a round surface, use either an 
isometric template for a guide or the point method as described in this 
section. Figure 15-19 is a solution to Figure 15-18 that was derived by 
using an isometric ellipse template. Figure 15-20 is a solution that was 

GIVEN: Front, top, and side views. 
PROBLEM: Draw an isometric drawing. 



SOLUTION: 




Figure 15-1 9(a) 



a 



:> 



i r 



J 




Figure 15-18 



Figure 15-19(b) 




Figure 15-19(c) 



Figure 15-19(d) 



Figure 15-19(e) 








Figure 15-19(f) 



Figure 15-I9(g) 



312 



Isometric Drawings 



Chap. 15 



SOLUTION: 



b 




AJ- 



PH« 



Figure 15-20(a) 



T 




Figure 15-20(b) 




Figure 15-20(d) 



Figure 15-20(e) 



Figure 15-20(f) 




Figure 15-20(g) 



derived by using the point method. The procedures are as Allows To 
draw a round surface by using an isometric ellipse template, do the fol- 



lowing: 



1 Define on one of the orthographic views (the one that shows 
' the round surface as part of a circle) the center point of the 



Sec. 15-5 Round and Irregular Surfaces 313 

round surface and the intersections of the center lines with the 
surfaces of the object. In this example the center point is 
marked 0, and the two intersections are marked points 1 and 2. 

2. Draw a rectangular box and transfer the points 1, 2, and to 
the front plane of the isometric drawing and label them 3, 4, 
and 5. 

3. Project the points in the front plane across the isometric draw- 
ing to the back Diane. 

4. Align the proper hole in the isometric ellipse template with the 
center lines on the front isometric surface, and draw in the iso- 
metric arc. Repeat the same procedure for the back surface. 

5. Erase all excess lines and smudges; check your work; draw in 
the remaining lines of the object lightly at first and then darken 
them to their proper color and pattern. 

To draw a round surface by using the point method; do the following: 

1. On one of the orthographic views (the one that shows the round 
surface as part of a circle) mark off a series of points along the 
rounded surface. The points need not be equidistant. The more 
points you take, the more accurate will be the final isometric 
ellipse. If necessary, make a full-sized supplementary layout. 

2. Dimension each point horizontally and vertically as shown. 

3. Transfer the dimensional values to the isometric axis as shown. 

4. Using a French curve as a guide, draw in the isometric arc. 

5. Transfer the points to the back of the surface, and, again using 
a French curve as a guide, draw in the isometric arc. 

6. Erase all excess lines and smudges; check your work; draw in 
the remaining lines of the object lightly at first and then darken 
them to their final color and pattern. 

Figure 15-21 is a sample problem that requires you to draw an iso- 
metric drawing from given orthographic views that contain an irregular 
surface. The point method described for drawing isometric drawings of 
round surfaces is directly applicable to the creation of isometric draw- 
ings of irregular surfaces provided that we use two of the orthographic 
views to locate the points. Two views are required because the surface 
may not be parallel to any of the principal planes. Figure 15-22 is the 
solution to Figure 15-21. 



GIVEN: An object. 

PROBLEM: Draw an isometric drawing of the object. 




MATL -J C.R. STEEL 



Figure 15-21 



Isometric Drawings 




Figure 15-22(b) 



Figure 15-2 2(d) 




Chap. 15 



Figure 15-22(a) 




Figure 15-22(c) 




Figure 15 -2 2(e) 



Sec. 15-6 



Isometric Dimensions 



315 



15-6 ISOMETRIC DIMENSIONS 

Isometric drawings may be dimensioned by using either the aligned 
system or the unidirectional system. All isometric drawings in this book 
are dimensioned by using the unidirectional system. Section 6-4 gives a 
further explanation of the differences between the two systems. 

Regardless of the system used, the leader lines must be drawn in 
the same isometric plane as the surface they are defining. The guide- 
lines for the dimensions in the aligned system are drawn parallel to the 
edge being defined while the guidelines for the unidirectional system 
are always horizontal. Figure 15-23 is another example of the unidirec- 
tional system. The numbers are drawn 1/8 to 3/16 in both systems. 



-75 -2 PLACES 



.62 DIA 



.33 DIA 




Figure 15-23 An example of an isometric drawing dimensioned 
using the unidirectional system. 



15-7 ISOMETRIC SECTIONAL VIEWS 

Isometric sectional views are used for the same reasons that ortho- 
graphic sectional views are used— to clarify objects by exposing impor- 
tant internal surfaces that would otherwise be hidden from direct view. 
Figure 15-24 shows a full isometric sectional view and a half isometric 
sectional view. Note that, as with orthographic sectional views, hidden 
lines are omitted and the cross-hatching lines are drawn medium to 




Figure 15-24 Isometric section cut. 



316 



Isometric Drawings 



Chap. 15 



light in color, 3/32 apart at an inclined angle. Isometric sectional views 
do not require a defining cutting plane and are usually presented as 
individual pictures with no accompanying reference drawing. Dimen- 
sions are placed on an isometric sectional view in the same way they 
are for regular isometric drawings. 



15-8 AXONOMETRIC DRAWINGS 

Isometric drawings are actually just one of a broad category of 
drawings called axonometric drawings. An axonometnc drawing is a 
pictorial drawing, drawn with instruments, that uses some initially 
defined axis system which remains parallel to infinity. 

There are three kinds of axonometric drawings: isometric, di- 
metric, and trimetric. The classification of an axonometric drawing 
depends on its axis system. An isometric axis has three equal angles 
f 120° ) a dimetric axis has two equal angles, and a trimetric axis has no 
equal angles. Figure 15-25 shows examples of the three axonometric 
axes. The oblique drawing, which is covered in the next chapter, is a 
special form of trimetric drawing. 



Dimetric 




Trimetric 



Figure 15-25 Examples of the three different types of axono- 
metric drawings: isometric, dimetric, and trimetric. 






;\ 



M 





Figure 15-26 An adjustable triangle. 



An adjustable triangle, such as the one shown in Figure 15-26, is 
useful when you are creating axonometric drawings because it may be 
set to any angle, thereby eliminating the need for constant measuring 
with a protractor. 



15-9 EXPLODED DRAWINGS 

Figure 15-27 is an example of an exploded drawing. Exploded 
drawings are useful because they enable the reader to visualize and 
understand technical information without requiring him (or her) to 
have a knowledge of orthographic projections. They are particularly 
well-suited to assembly drawings because they easily show the relation- 
ship between the various parts. 




Figure 15-27 An exploded drawing. 



317 



318 



Isometric Drawings 



Chap. 15 



Exploded drawings may be drawn by using any one of the axono- 
metric axis systems provided that the system chosen helps present the 
information clearly. Exploded drawings rarely contain dimensions or 
hidden lines because they are usually intended more to be pictures of 
technical information than actual technical drawings. Parts in an ex- 
ploded drawing are always labeled either by name or by part number. 



PROBLEMS 

Create isometric drawings of the following objects. Dimetric and trimet- 
ric drawings may also be created if assigned by your instructor. 

15-1 



r*i 



L 



>i 





- 

1 


-J *1- 


1 




- * ' 


1 



15-2 



JJ- 



ffl 



- 



±t 






15-3 



3.00 



1.50 



1.00 











i 




















, 


i 2.25 








1.50 










j 


i 










I 


' 


! ' 


1 


i 










^.75 





15-4 




5i 



§£ 















f 










1 




1 '• 












1 


- I.UU 

! i : 
















^,50 



15-5 



m 



^>; 



319 




320 

15-15 



Isometric Drawings 



Chap. 15 



75DIA 




2.00 



15-16 Draw an exploded isometric drawing of the following assembly. 
The washers are 1.00 O.D., 0.50 I.D., and 0.06 thick. Figure 
PI 5-1 6(a) illustrates how to draw an isometric representation of 
a bolt. 



WASHER 
2 REQD 
.063X.75 O.D. 
x.44 I.D. 

SPACER 
.25THK 




-|-16UNC-2AX1-| 



447ST67 
.63THK 



EEJ ^ NUT 




Problems 



321 



15-17 



4.00 



F 



3 



4 



I— .*5 




-.25 DIA 
4 PLACES 






i i 



I 






3.50 



1.7$ 



■1.00 



Obfsct is symmetrical 
about both axis 



322 

15-6 



Isometric Drawings 



2.50 



T 

1.50 



v ,f 



L .75 




Chap. IS 



K03 







_L 




T,3 





T 

138 



15-7 



.88 R 




15-8 



„. 



~ 



- 



& 



I?. 



I 



B 



¥ 



— 



Problems 



323 



15-9 




3.58 



15-11 



1.13R J5.X0 





94 R 



3ff\ 


r\ 


rt 


2.38 






\ 






. 





60° 




15-12 



Sill 



15-13 



V 



j— 



IT 

•— :25 



1.25 

1 



75 



50 



... 



t 



Object is symmetrical 
about both 
center lines 



\--„ 4-, J 



~A 



\ \ fi. 

1- -r _ ^ J _ 



,38 



J 



: :: 1 



1.38 



^.88 
—68 






OBLIQUE DRAWINGS 



16 




Figure 16-0 Photograph courtesy of AMF/Harley-Davidson. 



16-1 INTRODUCTION 

Oblique drawings are technical pictures that can be drawn with 
instruments. They are easier to draw than isometric drawings, but they 
contain more inherent visual distortion. Figure 16-1 compares oblique, 
isometric, and pictorial drawings of the same object and illustrates the 
visual difference among the three drawings. 

The basic reference system for oblique drawings is shown in Fig- 
ure 16-2. The most distinct characteristic of the oblique axis is the 
90° relationship between the left-hand axis .and the vertical axis. Be- 
cause of this 90° relationship, the front view and all surfaces parallel to 
it are almost identical to the front view of an orthographic drawing. 
This makes it very easy to transfer information between the two dif- 
ferent front views. 



Figure 16-1 A comparison between an isometric, a pictorial, and 
an oblique drawing. Note the amount of visual distortion in each. 




Pictorial 




Isometric 




Oblique 




Any Angle 



Figure 16-2 



325 



326 



Oblique Drawings 



Chap. 16 



The receding lines may be drawn at any convenient angle. (Up- 
ward and to the right at either 30° or 45° is most commonly used 
because these angles may be drawn with standard triangles.) The choice 
of which receding angle to use depends on which angle best shows the 

object involved. . 

Dimensional values are directly transferable from the front view 
of the orthographic drawing to the front view of the oblique drawing. 
Circles transfer as circles, not as ellipses as in isometric drawings, and 
angles transfer as the same angles. Dimensional values in all other views 
are not directly transferable. They can only be transferred from the 
orthographic views to the receding axis of the oblique drawing. 

Sometimes when dimensional values are transferred to the receding 
axis of the oblique drawing, they are redrawn at a reduced scale The 
scale reduction improves the visual quality of the drawing. Note that in 
Figure 16-3 the reduced scale of the receding axis changes the way the 
object looks. Although any scale reduction may be used, the most 
common is the half-scale reduction called a cabinet projection. If the 
dimensional values are transferred full scale, the resulting oblique draw- 
ing is called a cavalier projection. 

Oblique drawings do not normally include hidden lines, although 
they may be used if special emphasis is required. 





Scale 



Cavalier 
Projection 



Z7\ 



/—A 




/ 



-i- Scale 



V 



7\ 



ZI 



Scale 



Cabinet 

Projection 



Figure 16-3 A comparison between different scaled receding 
lines on oblique drawings. Note the difference in visual distortion 
in each. 



Sec. 16-2 



Normal Surfaces 



327 



16-2 NORMAL SURFACES 

Figure 16-4 is a sample problem that involves creating an oblique 
drawing from given orthographic views. Since all surfaces in the problem 
are normal (at 90° to each other), all dimensional values may be di- 
rectly transferred from the orthographic views to the axis of the oblique 
drawing. All values are to be transferred at full value, which means that 



GIVEN: Front, top, and side views. 
PROBLEM: Draw an oblique drawing. 



H 










P 



















-« L 



-« W 



Figure 16-4 



the resulting oblique drawing is a cavalier projection. Figure 16-5 is the 
solution to Figure 16-4 and was derived by using the following pro- 
cedure: 

SOLUTION: 

1. Make, to the best of your ability, an oblique freehand sketch of 
the proposed solution. 



S^ 




/ 


JS ^ 











Figure 16-5(a) 



328 



Oblique Drawings 



Chap. 16 



2. Using very light lines, lay out a rectangular box whose height, 
width, and length correspond to the height, width, and length 
given in the orthographic views. In this case, a receding axis of 
30° was chosen. 




Figure 16-5(b) 



3. Using very light lines, lay out the specific details of the object. 
Transfer the dimensional values directly from the orthographic 
views to the axis of the oblique drawing. For example, use a 
pair of dividers and verify all other dimensional values. 





Figure 16-5(c) 



Figure 16-5(d) 



Erase all excess lines and smudges; check your work; and draw 
in all lines to their final color and configuration. 




Figure 16-5(e) 



Sec. 16-2 



Normal Surfaces 



329 



Figures 16-6, 16-7, and 16-8 are further examples of oblique 
drawings created from given orthographic views. 

GIVEN: Front, top, and side views. 
PROBLEM: Draw an oblique drawing. 



-* W * 



SOLUTION: 




Figure 16 -6(b) 




Figure 16 -6(g) 



330 



Oblique Drawings 



Chap. 16 



GIVEN: Front, top and side views. 
PROBLEM: Draw a cabinet oblique drawing. 



SOLUTION: 







Figure 16 -7 (a) 



■ 





Figure 16-7(b) 



Figure 16-7(c) 



Half Scale 




,« 



?•" 




*£=* 



*£ 



^_ 



Figure 16-7(d) 



Figure 16-7(e) 



Figure 16-7(f) 



Cabinet Projection 



Figure 16-7(g) 




Sec. 16-2 



Normal Surfaces 



331 



GIVEN: Front, top, and side views. 

PROBLEM : Draw an oblique drawing with the receding axis slanted 

45° to the left. 







SOLUTION: 




Figure 16-8(a) 



Figure 16-8(b) 






Figure l6-8(c) 



Figure 16-8(d) 



Figure 16-8(e) 





Figure 16-8(f) 



Figure 16-8(g) 



332 



Oblique Drawings 



Chap. 16 



16-3 INCLINED AND OBLIQUE 
SURFACES 

Figure 16-9 is a sample problem that involves creating an oblique 
drawing from given orthographic views that contain an inclined surface. 
Unlike isometric drawings, angular dimensions may be directly trans- 
ferred from the front orthographic view to the front oblique view, there- 
by eliminating the need for supplementary layouts. Remember that 
this direct transfer only works on the front views and on surfaces 
parallel to the front view. 



GIVEN: Front, top, and side views. 
PROBLEM: Draw a cabinet oblique drawing. 











f ■ 

! 


i 
i 

1 














Figure 16-9 



SOLUTION: 



Figure 16-10 is the solution to Figure 16-9 and was derived by 
using the same procedure presented for normal surfaces in Section 16-2. 




Figure 16-10(a) 




HALF SCALE 



Figure 16-10(b) 



Sec. 16-3 



Inclined and Oblique Surfaces 



333 





Figure 16-10(d) 





Figure 16-1 0(e) 



Figure 16-1 0(f) 



Figure 16-11 is a sample problem that involves an object that in- 
cludes an oblique surface. The angle must be broken down into its 
linear components, and then the linear components may be transferred 
to the axis of the oblique drawing. Figure 16-12 is the solution to 
Figure 16-11 and was derived by using the same procedure outlined 
for Figure 16-4 in Section 16-2. 



GIVEN: Front, top, and side views. 
PROBLEM: Draw an oblique drawing. 










J 

a 






1 



Figure 16-11 



334 



Oblique Drawings 



Chap. 16 



SOLUTION 





Figure 16-12(a) 



Figure 16-1 2(b) 





Figure 16-12(c) 



Figure 16-1 2(d) 





Figure 16-1 2(e) 



Figure 16-1 2(f) 




Figure 16-1 2(g) 



Sec. 16-4 



Holes in Oblique Drawings 



335 



16-4 HOLES IN OBLIQUE DRAWINGS 

The techniques required to draw holes in oblique drawings vary 
according to the surface on which you are working. On the front sur- 
face and on all surfaces parallel to the front surface, holes are per- 
fectly round and may be drawn with the aid of a compass or a circle 
template. On any other surface elliptical holes must be drawn. Ellipti- 
cal holes may be drawn by using either the four-center ellipse method 
or by using an elliptical template as a guide. Remember that when you 
use an elliptical template, use only a template cut to the correct hole 
size, at the correct angle, which has been correctly aligned to the el- 
liptical hole's center line. 

When you are creating oblique drawings, take advantage, if possible, 
of the unique characteristics of the front view by positioning the ob- 
ject with as many holes as possible located in the front view. Figure 
16-13 shows two oblique drawings of the same object and demonstrates 
the value of correct object positioning. In the drawing on the left the 
object is positioned so that all holes are located in the front view; in 
the drawing on the right the object is positioned so that the holes are 
located in one of the receding surfaces. This difference is positioning 
enables the left drawing to be drawn by using circles for holes; the 
right drawing requires elliptical holes. Because of the elliptical hole 
requirement, the drawing on the right takes about four times as long to 
draw as the drawing on the left. In addition, there is no appreciable 
gain in technical clarity. It is, however, important to remember that in 
positioning an object your first consideration should be technical 
clarity and ease of understanding for the reader and not ease of draw- 
ing for the draftsman. 



6>T 




Poorly 

Positioned 



Correctly 
Positioned 



Figure 16-13 Two oblique drawings of the same object, one cor- 
rectly positioned and pne poorly posibioned. 



336 



Oblique Drawings 



Chap. 16 



16-5 ROUNDED AND IRREGULAR 
SURFACES 

Figure 16-14 is a sample problem that involves creating an oblique 
drawing from given orthographic views that contain a rounded surface. 



GIVEN: Front and side views. 
PROBLEM: Draw an oblique drawing. 




Figure 16-14 

Figure 16-15 is the solution and was derived by using the following 
precedure: 

SOLUTION: 

1. Make, to the best of your ability, an oblique freehand sketch of 
the solution. 




Figure 16-1 5(a) 



Sec. 1 6-5 



Rounded and Irregular Surfaces 



337 



2. Using very light lines, lay out a rectangular box whose height, 
width, and length correspond to the height, width, and length 
given in the orthographic views.' In this example a basic cylinder 
shape was substituted for the rectangular shape used. 






Figure 16-1 5(b) 



Figure 16-1 5(c) 



Figure 16-1 5(d) 



3. Using very light lines, lay out the specific details of the object. 
In this example the round portions of the object are all posi- 
tioned so that they appear in the front view or in views parallel 
to the front view. This positioning makes the object easier to 
draw. 




Figure 16-15(e) 



4. Erase all excess lines and smudges, and draw in all lines to their 
final color and configuration- 



Figure 16-1 5(g) 




338 



Oblique Drawings 



Chap. 16 



Figure 16-16 is another example of a rounded surface problem. 

Figure 16-17 is a sample problem that involves creating an oblique 
drawing from given orthographic views that contain an irregular surface. 
Figure 16-18 is the solution and was derived by breaking down the ir- 
regular surface into its defining points, locating these points in terms of 
the oblique axis system, transferring the points to the oblique drawing, 
and then reconnecting the points to form the oblique drawing of the 
irregular surface. The remainder of the oblique drawing is created as 
previously described. Figure 16-19 is the supplementary layout that 
was used to locate the irregular surface in terms of the oblique axis 
system. 



GIVEN: Front view and material thickness. 
PROBLEM: Draw an oblique drawing. 



SOLUTION: 




MATL 

2.00 AL6064-T4 




Figure 16-1 6(a) 



Figure 16-16(b) 






Figure 16-16(c) 



Figure 16-1 6(d) 



Figure 16-16(e) 



GIVEN: Front view and material thick- 
ness. 
PROBLEM: Draw an oblique drawing. 




MATL 
.75 THK 



Figure 16-17 



Sec. 16-5 
SOLUTION: 



Rounded and Irregular Surfaces 



339 




Figure 16-1 8(a) 







^-' 



Figure 16-18(b) 







Figure 16-18(c) 




*t— (- 

Figure 16-18(d) 




Figure 16-18(e) 




Figure 16-18(f) 




16-6 



Figure 16-19 Supplementary layout used to define the irregular 
surface in terms of its linear components. 



DIMENSIONING AN OBLIQUE 
DRAWING 



Oblique drawings may be dimensioned by using either the unidirec- 
tional or aligned systems. The front view and all other surfaces parallel 
to it are dimensioned in the same way that they were in the orthographic 
views (see Chapter 6), but dimensions along the receding axis must be 
drawn in the same oblique plane as the surface they are defining. 

In the aligned system, guidelines for dimensions that define re- 
ceding surfaces must be drawn parallel to the receding axis. Guidelines 
for dimensions that define surfaces in the front view or any surface 
parallel to the front view are drawn either horizontally or vertically 
depending on whether they are defining horizontal or vertical surfaces. 

In the unidirectional system, all guidelines are drawn horizontally. 
In both systems, all letters and numbers are drawn either 1/8 or 3/16 in 

height. 

Figure 16-20 is an example of an oblique drawing that has been 
dimensioned by using the unidirectional system. 



Figure 16-20 An example of an oblique drawing which has been 
dimensioned using the unidirectional system. 



1.00R-4 PLACES 




; 594 DIA-4 PLACES 



340 



Problems 



341 



16-7 OBLIQUE SECTIONAL VIEWS 

Figure 16-21 illustrates a full oblique sectional view, and Figure 16- 
22 illustrates a half oblique sectional view. Oblique sectional views are 
drawn in the same manner and for the same reasons that isometric sec- 
tional views are drawn. Since the only difference between the two 
sectional views is the defining axis system, the information given in Sec- 
tion 15-7 may also be applied to oblique sectional views. 





Figure 16-21 A full oblique section cut. 



Figure 16-22 A half oblique section cut. 



PROBLEMS 

Create oblique drawings of the following objects. Each square on the 
grid background is 0.20 p. 



16-1 



1.25 



-i -ll 




1.75 








l,lt* 










Oi5 














t 

I 1.50 








T . 

.50 , 


. 






' Y 










t 


L-.75 



2.50 



16-4 



342 

16-2 



Oblique Drawings 



Chap. 16 



[iiniinnmn iiiiiiiiiM 

■ H 

_ _, — — — — — - — 


L . 

.„___.------ „„-___ 

Tl 

I [ M|M||MJM 



16-3 All dimensions are in millimeters. 
100 DIA 



30DIA 





16-5 



1.25 DIA 



1.50 8 



*— 



h— 



_J 



15 H- 



-*\ .63 h«- 




L-1.38— | 



Problems 



343 



16-6 




16-7 



?& 



& 



£ 



- 



16-8 



2.75 DIA 



.88 DIA 



2.25 DIA 




•i 



- H 



.63 



rM 



.13-^ 



■M- 



UrL 



1.25 



1.25 
DIA 



3.25 
DIA 



38^ 



SYM 



344 



Oblique Drawings 



Chap. 16 



16-9 



m 





i: 



16-10 



1.25DIA 



.50DIA 
4 PLACES 




50TYP 



5.00 Dl A 



3.00 Dl A 



3.75 Dl A 



16-11 




MATL.25 STEEL 



Problems 



345 



16-12 



.50 DIA 



.25 DIA 
4 PLACES 




1.00 



dto^ 



» I i J I : 



2.25 



4.00 



MATL 
4- THK 



.88 



16-13 



1.00 



16-14 




1 1 1 1 J W-- 


Ml 1 


- 


-.*_ it 




--i- 










?27 


__.._ 


Z/2 






: Jt — s v 




a ^\T 




t \ 




A --_ 




~» ~ ^ " 




V i h ~ 


—Z.1~ 


H V ./ t 


— ■*-»-, WJ 


^i ttt 


*Z2, 




7z/^ r7 : 








f XJ* z^ 




uul£2jn^ 




















™ I : 


,-hh 



-J r -20UNC-2Axii 
HEX HEAD 

WASHER 
063X.75QD.X.38I.D. 



COVER .38THK 



BASE .63 THK 



NUT 



16-15 




3,00 




346 

16-16 



Oblique Drawings 



Chap. 16 




.38 



T 



-75 





75 R 





DEVELOPMENT 
DRAWINGS 



17 




jHnC'i; 



Figure 17-0 Photograph courtesy of General Motors Corp. 



GIVEN: An object. 

PROBLEM: Develop the flat pattern. 





Figure 17-1 



SOLUTION: 




1,4 2£ 

Figure 17-2(a) 



17-1 INTRODUCTION 

Development drawings are flat patterns which, when folded in an ap- 
propriate manner, form a desired object. They are most commonly used 

in sheet metal work. 

There are four major categories of development drawings: prisms, 
cylinders, pyramids, and cones. Prism and cylinder development draw- 
ings are created by using the same basic drawing techniques. Pyramid 
and cone development drawings also use the same basic drawing tech- 
nique. This chapter will explain and present solved sample problems of 

each category. 

When you make actual patterns, your development drawing will 
usually include extra metal for bend and seam allowances. The amount 
of extra metal to be included depends on the kind of metal being fab- 
ricated, the thickness of the metal, and the kind of seam to be used. 
This chapter does not include information on bend or seam allowance; 
it presents only the information required to develop a given object into 
its ideal flat pattern. 



17-2 RECTANGULAR PRISMS 

Figure 17-1 is an example of a problem that involves a rectangular 
prism All surfaces are 90 c to each other. The problem is to develop a 
flat pattern which, when folded properly, will form the desired rectan- 
gular prism. Assume that the object is completely enclosed and that 
there are no open surfaces. Figure 17-2 is the solution and was derived 
by the following procedure: 

1. Draw as many orthographic views as are necessary to completely 
define every surface of the given object. In this example two 
views (front and top) are sufficient, but for most objects more 
than two views are needed. Partial orthographic views, including 
auxiliary views are sometimes used to insure a complete defim- 

- tion of surfaces not clearly defined in the given orthographic 

views. 

Position the orthographic views on the left side of the drawing 

paper. 
2 Define all points of the object. Use numbers for the points 
' along the bottom edges and letters for the points along the top 

edges. This identification system will prevent confusion as you 

develop the surfaces. 
3. From the front orthographic view, extend a very light layout 

line from every labeled point as shown in Figure 17-2(c). All 

of these lines should be parallel to each other. These lines are 

called stretchout lines. 



348 





1.4 



P 



2,3 



C 

B 
2 

B,C 



Figure 17-2(b) 



1 2 " ~ J 

Figure 17 -2(c) 



1,4 



2,3 



ir 



Figure 17 -2(d) 



349 



350 



Development Drawings 



Chap. 17 



%4 



Somewhere along the bottom (lowest) stretchout line, define 
point 1. Then, using point 1 as a starting mark, lay out (along 
the bottom stretchout line) the remaining points that define the 
bottom edges of the object. This may be done by transferring 
the line distances found in the orthographic views. Label each 
point as you mark it off. There should be two point Is along 
the stretchout line because the object must end at the same 
point at which it started in order for the object to be completely 
enclosed. Remember that line 4-1 is also part of the object. 
Draw lines, perpendicular to the stretchout lines, from each 
point located on the stretchout line. 




2,3 



1 5 



3 1 






Figure 17 -2(e) 



6. Identify and label all points originally defined in the ortho- 
graphic views on the flat pattern portion of the drawing by 
using the stretchout lines drawn in step 3 and the perpendicular 
lines drawn in step 5. For example, point A is known (from the 
information found in drawing the orthographic views) to be 
located directly above point 1. We also know that point A is 
somewhere along the stretchout line drawn from point A in 
step 3. Where the point A stretchout line intersects the perpen- 
dicular line from point 1 is point A in the flat pattern. Point A 
could also have been found by directly transferring the distance 
A-l from the front orthographic view to the line perpendicular 
to point 1 on the stretchout line, 

7. Lay out the top and bottom of the object as shown in Figure 
17-2(d). This can be done by either transferring the distance 
and angles from the orthographic views or by drawing lines 
perpendicular to lines C-D and 3-4 located on the flat pattern 



!7j . 



Sec. 1 7-2 



Rectangular Prisms 



351 



and then, using a compass, drawing arcs of lengths B-C, D-A, 
2-3, and 4-1 from points C, D, 3, and 4, respectively. The 
compass method was used in this example. 
8. Erase all excess layout lines. Darken in the outside periphery of 
the flat pattern with heavy visible lines. Do not erase the layout 
lines that represent the lines along which the pattern is to be 
folded. The point labels may or may not be erased, depending 
on the individual shop requirements. 

Figure 17-3 is another example of a problem that involves a rect- 
angular prism. Figure 17-4 is the appropriate development drawing and 
was derived by using the same procedure outlined for Figure 17-2. Note 
how the top surfaces were developed in this example. 

SOLUTION: 



GIVEN: An object. 

PROBLEM: Develop the flat pattern. 




Figure 17-3 



I kj ih g 



a b|c die f 
1 2 



aJ 



A* 



bk 



tg 



e,h 



1,4 23 

Figure 17 -4(a) 



ikii nfi"u 



3 P\ c die ,f 
1 2 



fej d,« 




* k Li* 



14 



2,3 



1 2 

Figure 17 -4(b) 



nzr \ 



1 2 



h g 



qi 4i 



3,l 



bk 



1,9 



e.h 



14 



23 



1 2 

Figure I7~4(c) 



352 



Development Drawings 



Chap. 17 



4, , , 3 

1 klj ilh g 




in 



j < 



c d 



h 9 



£U 



cid 



al 



t* 



fg 



eh 



14 



23 




Figure 17 -4(e) 



17-3 INCLINED PRISMS 



prism 



m 



Figure 17-5 is an example of a problem that involves an inclined 
. In this example a supplementary partial auxiliary view was needed 



4 addition to the two standard views (front and top) to completely 
define the inclined surface. Figure 17-6 is the development drawing for 
the object shown in Figure 17-5 and was derived by using basically the 
same procedure that was outlined for Figure 17-2. Note that in the flat 
pattern portion of the development drawing the four corners of the in- 
clined surface are 90°. 



Sec. 1 7-3 



Inclined Prisms 



353 



GIVEN: An object. 

PROBLEM: Develop the flat pattern. 



SOLUTION: 




Figure 17-5 





2 3 

Figure 17-6{b) 



Figure 17 -6(a) 



4 1 



TRUE SHAPE of 
PLANE v-w-x-y 




w s_ 



2 3 

Figure 17-6(c) 



4 1 




Figure 17 -6(d) 



z u 




Figure 17-6(e) 



17-4 OBLIQUE PRISMS 

Figure 17-7 is an example of a problem that involves an oblique 
prism, that is, a prism that contains an oblique surface 1-2-3. In order 
to develop a correct flat pattern, you must know the exact shape of 
surface 1-2-3. To find the exact shape of surface 1-2-3, draw a second- 
ary auxiliary view. The true shape of surface 1-2-3, once completely 
defined, may be transferred to the flat pattern. Figure 17-8 is the devel- 
opment drawing for Figure 17-7 and is derived by using basically the 
same method outlined for Figure 17-2. Figure 17-9 is the solution to 
this problem. 



354 



Sec. 174 



Oblique Prisms 



355 



GIVEN: An object. 

PROBLEM: Develop the flat pattern. 



SOLUTION: 




Figure 17-7 




4 1 



5 , 4 1 




True Shape 
of Plane 1-2-3 




Figure 17-8 A supplementary layout used to 
determine the true shape of surface 1-2-3. 




Figure 17-9(b) 



5.4 1 




3 




Figure 17-9(c) 




356 



Sec. 17-5 

17-5 CYLINDERS 



Cylinders 



357 



GIVEN: An object. 

PROBLEM: Develop the flat pattern. 



Figure 17-10 is an example of a problem that involves a cylinder. 
Figure 17-11 is the development drawing derived from Figure 17-10 
and was created by using basically the same procedure as was outlined 
for Figure 17-2. 

The stretchout length of the cylinder is equal to its circumference. 
If, for example, the cylinder in Figure 17-10 had a diameter of 1.38, 
the stretchout length of the flat pattern would be 4.33. 

circumference = it diameter 
C = n (dia) 
= (3.14)(1.38) 
= 4.33 

If the cylinder size had been given in terms of its radius, 0.69 R, 
the stretchout length calculations would have been 

circumference - 2n radius 

C = 2nR 

= 2(3.14)(0.69) 

= 4.33 

The top and bottom surfaces of the cylinder in Figure 17-10 are 
circles that ideally join the rest of the flat pattern at tangency points. 
Tangency points are infinitesimal points that have no physical size and 
are therefore impossible to manufacture. In reality, the top and bottom 
surfaces of a cylindrical flat pattern are made separately and then joined 
to the cylinder during assembly of the cylinder. For our study, assume 
that tangency points can be manufactured and draw in the top and bot- 
tom surfaces as shown in Figure 17-11. 



DIA 




Figure 17-10 



SOLUTION: 





Figure 17-ll(a) 



c,d 



a,b 




Figure 17 -11(b) 



358 



Development Drawings 



Chap. 17 




Figure 17-ll(c) 




Figure 17 -11(d) 






Figure 17-1 1(e) 



Figure 17-12 is a cylinder that contains an inclined surface. Figure 
17-13 is the development drawing derived from Figure 17-12 by using 
the procedure outlined for Figure 17-2. The orthographic views include 
a partial auxiliary view of the inclined surface that was created by 
using the procedure explained in Section 14-9 and is illustrated in Fig- 
ure 17-14. As with the top and bottom surfaces of Figure 17-12, the 
top and bottom surfaces join the rest of the flat pattern at tangency 
points which we assume are possible to manufacture. 



GIVEN: An object. 

PROBLEM: Develop the flat pattern. 



SOLUTION: 





Figure 17-12 



Figure 17-13(a) 



359 



360 



Development Drawings 



Chap. 17 





1 



TTD 



Figure 17 -13(b) 



ABCDEFGHIJKLA 



Figure 17 -13(c) 







ABCDEFGHIJKLA 



Figure 17 -13(d) 



Sec. 17-5 



Cylinders 



361 








2 




From Supplementary 
Layout 



Figure 17 -13(e) 







Figure 17-1 3(f) 




Figure 17-14 A supplementary layout used to derive the true 
shape of the top surface. 



17-6 PYRAMIDS 



GIVEN: An object. 

PROBLEM: Develop the flat pattern. 



The flat patterns of pyramids are developed differently from the 
patterns of prisms and cylinders. Figure 17-15 is an example of a prob- 
lem that involves a pyramid and Figure 17-16 is the development draw- 
ing. It was created by using the following procedure: 



SOLUTION: 




Figure 17-15 




Figure 17 -16(a) 



362 






Figure 17-16(b) Use true length of line 0-1 ; see Figure 17-17. 






Figure 17-16(c) 






Figure 17 -16(d) 



363 



364 



Development Drawings 



Chap. 17 






Figure 17 -16(e) 






Figure 17 -16(f) 



Draw as many orthographic views as are necessary to completely 
define all surfaces of the object. Keep the views on the left side 
of the drawing. Unfortunately, the orthographic views, as 
presented, do not completely define the pyramid. We do not 
know the true lengths of lines 0-1, 0-2, or 0-3, and therefore 
we do not know the true shapes of the enclosed surfaces. To 
find the true length of lines 0-1, 0-2, and 0-3, we may either 
use the secondary auxiliary view method explained in Section 
11-6 or the revolution method explained in Appendix A (il- 



Sec. 17-6 



Pyramids 



365 



True Length 
of 0-1 




Figure 17-17 A supplementary layout which uses the revolution 
method to determine the true length of line 0-1. 



lustrated in Figure 17-17). In this example the revolution 
method was used. Regardless of which method you choose to 
use, the important thing to remember is that you must know 
exactly the true length of every line involved in the object. 

2. Once the true length of all lines and the true shape of all sur- 
faces have been determined, pick a point somewhere on the 
drawing and label it point 0. From point draw an arc of 
radius 0-1. Mark a point 1 on the arc, and then draw in (using a 
very light layout line) line 0-1. 

3. From point 1 draw an arc of radius 1-2. Obtain the distance 
1-2 from the orthographic views. Label the intersection of the 
large arc drawn from point and the arc drawn from point 1 as 
point 2. Draw (using very light layout lines) lines 0-2 and 1-2. 

4. In a similar manner, complete the layout of the pyramid's flat 
pattern. 

5. Erase all excess lines and darken in the periphery of the flat 
pattern with heavy visible lines. Do not erase the lines that 
represent the folding lines of the pattern. The point labels may 
or may not be erased, depending on individual shop require- 
ments. 



This procedure may be used for any pyramid or cone problem. 



366 



Development Drawings 



Chap. 17 



GIVEN: An object. 

PROBLEM: Develop the flat pattern. 




Figure 17-18 



Figure 17-18 is a pyramid problem that includes an oblique sur- 
face. Figure 17-19 is the development drawing for the pyramid and was 
created by using the same procedure that was outlined for Figure 17-15. 
In this example we assume that the object has neither top nor bottom 
surfaces. 



SOLUTION: 

ALL Distances From 
Supplementary Layout 




0-1 R 



Figure 17 -19 (a) 



Point 4 





(MR 



Point 3 
Figure 17-19(c) 




Figure 17 -19(d) 




Figure 17 -19(e) 




Sec. 1 7-7 



Cones 



367 



As with other complicated problems, we may solve this problem 
by thinking of it in terms of the simpler components problems that 
comprise it. We can draw the basic flat pattern of the pyramid as was 
done for Figure 17-15 and then mark off on each leg the distance that 
represents the distance from the theoretical apex to the oblique sur- 
face along that leg. To get these true distances, we start with the basic 
orthographic views and by using the revolution method outlined in 
Appendix A. For your convenience, the orthographic views, along with 
the appropriate revolution method layout lines, have been redrawn in 
Figures 17-20(a) and 17-20(b) so that you may see how each line was 
drawn. These supplementary layouts are commonly used by draftsmen 
to help insure accurate finished drawings. 






Figure 17-20(a) Supplementary layout 
used to determine the true length of all 
the legs. 



Figure 17-20(b) 



17-7 CONES 

Figure 17-21 is an example of a problem that involves a cone. 
Figure 17-22 is the development drawing and was derived by using 
basically the same procedure as was outlined for Figure 17-15. 

A unique feature of cones is that they have no natural edges to use 
as reference lines. To overcome this, we add theoretical lines as needed 
and work from them as if they were, in fact, edges on the object. In this 
example line 0-1 was added. Line 0-1 was located as shown because its 
top view is parallel to one of the principal plane lines. This means that 
its front view is true length (see Section 11-6 for further explanation). 
We need the true edge length of the cone in order to develop the flat 
pattern. 



GIVEN: An object. 

PROBLEM: Develop the flat pattern. 




Figure 17-21 



SOLUTION: 






Figure 17 -2 2 (a) 

The stretchout length of a cone's flat pattern, which is an arc, is 
found by the following equation: 

R 



SL = 



TEL 



(360°) 



(20-1) 



where 



SL = stretchout length 
R = radius 
TEL = true edge length 

This equation yields a value for SL in terms of degrees. This means 
that a protractor will be needed to lay out the SL value. The R/TEL 
part of the equation is a proportion between the radius of the flat pat- 
tern (equal to the true slant height of the cone) and the circumferential 
base distance of the cone. By multiplying this proportion by 360 , we 
can find out how many degrees of the full circle (360° } are needed for 






Figure 17-22(b) 



368 



Sec. 1 7-7 



Cones 



369 






Figure 17-22(c) 






Figure 17-22(d) 



the cone. In this example the slant height of the cone is 2.50 and the 
radius is 0.75. Substituting these values into Equation (20-1), we obtain 

R 



SL 


TEL 


(360°) 




0.75 
2.50 


(360°) 




= 0.30(360°) 


SL 


= 108° 




Therefore, the stretchout length, SL, 


is equal to 108°. 



370 



Development Drawings 



Chap. 17 



PROBLEMS 

Develop the flat pattern for the following objects. Dimension the flat 
pattern. If assigned by your instructor, redraw the flat pattern onto 
heavy paper or cardboard and then cut out the pattern and fold it up to 
form a three-dimensional model. 



17-1 



17-2 



2J00 




17-3 



1.75 




1.00 




17-4 



1.13 



2.13 



1.00 



17-5 





Problems 



371 




1.25 




7 

2.38 



T 



< 1.31 



17-8 



.75 



,94 R 




17-9 



1-25R 




\ 








1 


69R ^ 


v: 


h 


i. 


50 




x 


j 


t 






V 


y 


100 






^ t : 





17-10 



1.3a R 




372 Development Drawings 

17-11 



.as rt 



Chap. 17 





2.75 



17-12 




2.50 



1.00 




17-13 



.75 R 




1.00 



Problems 



373 



17-14 



17-15 



.68R 





1.50 














.75 




_L 






30° 






t 










1.00 










{ 












225 



FINDING THE TRUE 

LENGTH OF A LINE BY USING 

THE REVOLUTION METHOD 



APPENDIX 



A 



Define the line in at least two different orthographic views 
[Figure A-l(a)]. In any one of the views revolve the line so 
that it becomes parallel to one of the principal plane lines 
[Figure A-l(b)]. 

In the accompanying illustration a line was drawn in the top 
view parallel to the horizontal principal plane line through point 
1 T and then point 2 T was rotated about point 1 T until it inter- 
sected this line. The intersection of the line parallel to the 
principal plane line and the rotation of point 2 T was labeled 
point 2^ . 

Project the point rotated in step 1 into the other orthographic 
view so that it intersects a line drawn parallel to the principal 
plane line through the other view of the point. A line drawn 
from this point to the nonrotated point is the true length of 
the line [Figure A-l(c)] . 

In the accompanying illustration a line was drawn parallel to 
the principal plane line through point 2 F and point 2' T was 
projected into the front view so that it intersected the parallel 
line as shown. This intersection was labeled 2 F . Line 1 F -2 F is 
the true length of the line. 



Top 


/ 2 r 




1 T 






V 




E 


Front 


\ 

F 








Vt 








2 T 




t 








Vs 


< 








V 


*F 





/Indicates parallel lines 



Figure A-l 



374 



App. A 



Finding the True Length of a Line 



375 



Figures A-2 and A-3 are further examples of the revolution 
method used to find the true length of a line. 



Front 



Side 




Flgur* A-2 




Sid* 




Figure A-3 



GAME PROBLEMS 



APPENDIX 



B 



This section has been included just for the fun of it. Like most 
skilled people, draftsmen enjoy games and puzzles that test and chal- 
lenge their expertise; thus, they often try to stump one another with 
game problems. Three have been included here for you to test your 
skill. Try them and if you get stuck, write me and I'll send you the 
answers. Have fun! 



Top 




Front 



□ 



Side ? 




Hollow object 



Both are solid objects 



Top 




Front 



Side ? 




Figure B-l The two problems on the left side of the page are 
missing view problems. The problem on the right side requires 
you to draw 8 hollow objects stacked as shown. Remember all 
the objects are hollow. 



376 



APPENDIX 



DRAFTING ART 




This section presents samples of drafting art. Draftsmen may use 
their skill in geometric construction, line technique, and depth visualiz- 
ation to create anything from geometric design to illustration. They are 
limited only by their own imaginations and aggressiveness. Look over 
the examples presented here and try copying a few. Then make up your 
own creations. 




Figure C-4 



Figure C-5 (All straight lines.) 



377 



STANDARD 
THREAD SIZES 



APPENDIX 



D 



Whenever possible, a draftsman should call for standard thread 
sizes in his designs. Standard threads may be purchased from many dif- 
ferent manufacturers, are completely interchangeable, and are relatively 
inexpensive when compared to "special" thread sizes. 

Tables D-l and D-2 are the UNC and UNF standards. To find the 
standard size for a given diameter, look up the diameter under the 
desired thread {UNC or UNF) and read the standard thread size adjacent 
to it. For example, a W-diameter thread UNC has 20 threads per inch. 
The drawing call out would be 

--20 UNC 

4 

A 1V4 UNF has 12 threads per inch and would be called out on a draw- 
ing as 

1^-12 UNF 

4 

The size numbers at the top of the tables are for small diameter 
threads. For example a #4 UNF has a diameter of 0.112 and 48 threads 
per inch. The drawing call out would be 

#4(0.112)-48 UNF 

Tables D-3 and D-4 define the 8 and 12 National (N) series thread. 
In each case, all diameters in the series are made with the same number 
of threads. All 8 series threads have 8 threads per inch. All 12 series 
threads have 12 threads per inch. For example, a 1-7/8 diameter series 
8 thread would have a drawing call out 

l|--8UN 



378 



App. D. 

TABLE D-l-UNC 



Standard Thread Sizes 



TABLE D-2-UNF 



379 



TABLE D-3-Series 8 



TABLE D-4-Series 12 





*. 


CD 
£ 


Threads Pt 
inch (P) 


1 (0.073) 


64 


2 (0.086) 


56 


3 (0.99) 


48 


4 (0.112) 


40 


5 (0.125) 


40 


6 (0.138) 


32 


8 (0.164) 


32 


10 (0.190) 


24 


12 (0.216) 


24 


1/4 


20 


5/16 


18 


3/8 


16 


7/16 


14 


1/2 


13 


1/2 


12 


9/16 


12 


5/8 


11 


3/4 


10 


7/8 


9 


1 


8 


1 1/8 


7 


1 1/4 


7 


1 3/8 


6 


1 1/2 


6 


1 3/4 


5 


2 


4 1/2 


2 1/4 


4 1/2 


2 1/2 


4 


2 3/4 


4 


3 


4 


3 1/4 


4 


3 1/2 


4 


3 3/4 


4 


4 


4 



CD 

s 

a 

5 


v. 

3 cj 


(0.060) 


80 


1 (0.073) 


72 


2 (0.086) 


64 


3 (0.099) 


56 


4 (0.112) 


48 


5 (0.125) 


44 


6 (0.138) 


40 


8 (0.164) 


36 


10 (0.190) 


32 


12 (0.216) 


28 


1/4 


28 


5/16 


24 


3/8 


24 


7/16 


20 


1/2 


20 


9/16 


18 


5/8 


18 


3/4 


16 


7/8 


14 


1 


12 


1 1/8 


12 


1 1/4 


12 


1 3/8 


12 


1 1/2 


12 



CD 
CD 

s 

a 


5 cj 


1 1/8 


8 


1 1/4 


8 


1 3/8 


8 


1 1/2 


8 


1 5/8 


8 


1 3/4 


8 


17/8 


8 


2 


8 


2 1/8 


8 


2 1/4 


8 


2 1/2 


8 


2 3/4 


8 


3 


8 


3 1/4 


8 


3 1/2 


8 


3 3/4 


8 


4 


8 


4 1/4 


8 


4 1/2 


8 


4 3/4 


8 


5 


8 


5 1/4 


8 


5 1/2 


8 


5 3/4 


8 


6 


8 



■21 

CD 

s 

o 

5 


CD O 


1/2 


12 


5/8 


12 


1 1/16 


12 


3/4 


12 


1 3/16 


12 


7/8 


12 


15/16 


12 


1 1/16 


12 


1 3/16 


12 


1 5/16 


12 


17/16 


12 


1 5/8 


12 


13/4 


12 


1 7/8 


12 


2 


12 


2 1/8 


12 


2 1/4 


12 


2 3/8 


12 


2 1/2 


12 


2 5/8 


12 


2 3/4 


12 


2 7/8 


12 


3 


12 


3 1/8 


12 


3 1/4 


12 


3 3/8 


12 


3 1/2 


12 


3 5/8 


12 


3 3/4 


12 


3 7/8 


12 


4 


12 


4 1/4 


12 


4 1/2 


12 


4 3/4 


12 


5 


12 


5 1/4 


12 


5 1/2 


12 


5 3/4 


12 


6 


12 



380 



Standard Thread Sizes 



App. D 



Pilot Drill Sizes for Coarse and Fine Threads* 







Coarse (UNC, NC) 


Fine (UNF t NF) 


Nominal Thread 


Threads 


Pilot Drill 


Threads 


Pilot Drill 


Diameter Per Inch 


Diameter 


Per Inch 


Diameter 


.073 


1 


64 


No. 53 


72 


No. 53 


.086 


2 


56 


No. 50 


64 


No. 50 


.099 


3 


48 


No. 47 


56 


No. 45 


.112 


4 


40 


No. 43 


48 


No. 42 


.125 


5 


40 


No. 38 


44 


No. 37 


.138 


6 


32 


No. 36 


40 


No. 33 


.164 


8 


32 


No. 29 


36 


No. 29 


.190 


10 


24 


No. 25 


32 


No. 21 


.216 


12 


24 


No. 16 


28 


No. 14 


.250 


1/4 


20 


No. 7 


28 


No. 3 


.3125 


5/16 


18 


F 


24 


I 


.375 


3/8 


16 


5/16 


24 


Q 


.4375 


7/16 


14 


U 


20 


25/64 


.500 


1/2 


13 


27/64 


20 


29/64 


.5625 


9/16 


12 


31/64 


18 


33/64 


.625 


bfB 


11 


17/32 


18 


37/64 


.750 


3/4 


10 


21/32 


16 


11/16 


.875 


7/8 


9 


49/64 


14 


13/16 


1.000 


1 


8 


7/8 


12 


59/64 


i.125 


1 1/8 


7 


63/64 


12 


1 3/64 


1.250 


I 1/4 


7 


17/64 


12 


1 11/64 


1.375 


1 3/8 


6 


1 13/64 


12 


1 19/64 


1.500 


1 1/2 


6 


1 21/64 


12 


1 27/64 



*from ANSB1. 1-1960 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 



Beakley, George C, and Ernest G. Chilton, Introduction to Engineering 
Design and Graphics. New York: Macmillan, 1973. 

Brown, Walter C, Drafting for Industry. South Holland, 111.: Goodheart- 
Willcox, 1974. 

Earle, James H., Design Drafting. Reading, Mass.: Addison-Wesley, 1972. 

French, Thomas E,, and Charles J. Vierck, Engineering Drawing and 
Graphic Technology, 11th ed. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1972. 

Fryklund, Verne C, and Frank R. Kepler, General Drafting. Blooming- 
ton, 111.: McKnight and McKnight, 1969. 

Giachino, J. W., and H. J. Beukema, Engineering Technical Drafting and 
Graphics, 3rd ed. Chicago: American Technical Society, 1972. 

Giesecke, Frederick E., et al., Technical Drawing, 6th ed. New York: 
Macmillan, 1974. 

Grant, Hiram E., Engineering Drawing. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1962. 

Hammond, Robert H., et al., Engineering Graphics. New York- Roland 
Press, 1964. 

Hoelscher, Randolph P., et al., Basic Drawing for Engineering Tech- 
nology. New York: Wiley, 1964. 

Hornung, William J., Mechanical Drafting. Englewood Cliffs N J ■ 
Prentice-Hall, 1957. 

Jensen, C. H., and F. H. S. Mason, Drafting Fundamentals, 2nd ed New 
York: McGraw-Hill, 1967. 

Luzzadder, Warren J., Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing, 6th ed 
Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1971. 

McCabe, Francis T., et al., Mechanical Drafting Essential. Englewood 
Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1967. 

Nelson, Howard C, A Handbook of Drafting Rules and Principles. 
Bloomington, 111.: McKnight and McKnight, 1958. 



381 



INDEX 



Adjustable curve, 14 
American Welding Society, 261 
Ames lettering guide, 28 
Angle, bisecting, 63 
Arrowheads: 

how to draw, 114 

use, 113 
Assembly drawings, 280 
Auxiliary views: 

partial, 231 

projection theory method, 228-231 

reference line method, 225-228 

secondary, 232-240 
no true length line, 240 
Axonometric drawings, 316 

B 

Bolts: 
how to draw hex heads, 258 
how to draw square heads, 259 
types, 255 

Bosses, 198 

Break lines, 286 

Brush, drafting, 15 



Cabinet projection (see Oblique draw- 
ings) 
Castings, 195-199 

Cavalier projection (see Oblique draw- 
ings) 
Center line edge points, 171 
Center lines, 26 
Center point, 123 
Centimeter (see Metric system) 
Chamfers, 181 
Compasses: 

how to use, 10 

leads, 11 
Coordinate system (see Dimensioning) 
Counterbore, 288-289 
Countersink, 288-289 
.Curves: 

definition, 82 

orthographic projection, 82-83 



Curves (French), 12 
Cutting plane lines, 206 

D 

Detail drawings, 282 
Development drawings: 

cones, 367 

cylinders: 
inclined prisms, 352 
inclined surfaces, 359 
normal surfaces, 357 
oblique prisms, 354 
pyramids, 362 
rectangular prisms, 348 

definition, 348 
Dihedral angle, 149 
Dimensioning: 

aligned system, 123 

angles, 124 

baseline system, 125 

common errors, 128 

coordinate system, 126 

holes, 123-124 

hole-to-hole system, 126 

irregular curves, 128 

isometric drawings r 315 

oblique drawings, 340 

REF note, 130 

rules, 114-122 

sectional views, 214 

small distances and angles, 125 

tabular, 126 

unidirectional system, 123 
Dimension line, 113 
Dimetric drawings, 316 
Dividers, 15 
Drafting art, 377 
Drafting game problems, 376 
Drafting machine, 14 
Drawing detail, 287 
Drawing zones, 284 
Drilling, 288-289 

E 

Ellipse, how to draw: 
approximate method, 62 
four center method, 306-307 



383 



3S4 



INDEX 



Epoxy, 247 
Erassrs: 

gum, 3 

types, 3 

Erasing shield, 3 
European drawing system (see First 

angle projection) 
Exploded drawings, 317 
Extension lines, 113 



Lines (cont.): 
hidden, 90-91 
how to draw, 38 
intensity, 27 
kinds, 26 

orthographic projection, 77-80 
principal plane, 74 
tangency, 95 
thickness, 26-27 
true length, 233 



Fasteners (non-mechanical), 247 
Fillet: 

between a circle and a line, 59 

between two circles, 57 

definition, 195 

how to draw, 46-47 
First angle projection, 272 
Flat patterns (see Development draw- 
ings) 
French curves (see Curves) 

G 

Geometric constructions, general in- 
dex, 36-37 



H 



Hexagon, 49-53 

Hidden lines: 
definition, 26, 90 
rules for using, 91 

I 

Isometric drawings: 
axis, 298 
definition, 297 
of holes, 306 
irregular surfaces, 313 
normal surfaces, 299 
oblique surfaces, 305 
round surfaces, 311 
slanted surfaces, 302 



Leader lines, 26, 113 
Leadholders, 3 
Leads, 3 
Lettering: 

freehand inclined, 27 

freehand vertical, 27 
Lettering guide, 29 
Lines: 

addition and subtraction, 39 

base, 125-126 

bisecting, 42-43 

datum, 125 

definition, 77 

dividing into equal parts, 44 

dividing into proportional parts, 45 

drawing parallel, 40-41 

guide, 28 



M 

Machine marks, 198-199 

Magnifying glass, 15 

Meter, 267 

Metric system, conversion to inches: 

definition, 267 

mathmatically, 268 

tables, 270 
Millimeter, 267 
Mitre line, 76 
Models, 101 

N 

National Aircraft Standards, 261 

Notes: 

drawing, 284 

fillets and rounds, 195 

O 

Object, 89 
Oblique drawings: 
axis, 325 

cabinet projection, 326 
cavalier projection, 326 
definition, 325 
holes, 335 

inclined surfaces, 332 
irregular surfaces, 338 
normal surfaces, 327 
oblique surfaces, 333 
positioning, 335 
round surfaces, 336 
Octagon, 56 
Ogee curve (see S-curve) 
One view drawings, 284 
Orthographic projection: 
compound edges, 139-143 
curved surfaces, 95 
cylinders: 

curved cuts, 178 

cut above the centerline, 172 

cut below the centerline, 174 

eccentric, 184 

holes in, 184 

hollow sections, 186 

inclinded cuts, 176 
definition, 71 
dihedral angles, 149-152 
fillets and rounds, 195 
inclined surfaces, 94 
normal surfaces, 88 



INDEX 



385 



Orthographic projection (cont.): 
oblique surfaces, 144-147, 153-161, 

162-164 
parallel edges, 147-149 



Paper: 

graph, 97 

grid, 97 
Parabola, 64 
Partial views, 284 
Parts list, 283 
Pencils (see Leadholders) 
Pentagon, 54-55 
Phantom lines, 27 
Pictorial drawings, 297, 325 
Pilot holes: 

definition, 255 

depth, 256 

table of sizes, 380 
Pitch (see Threads) 
Planes: 

definition, 80 

orthographic projection, 80-81 
Points, 38, 75-77 
Principal plane lines, 74 
Production drawings, 279-289 
Projection rectangle, 76 
Protractors: 

how to use, 11 

leads, 11 

Q 

Quadrapads, 97 

R 

Reaming, 288-289 

Revision blocks, 283 

Revolution method, 365, 367, 374 

Rivets: 

detailed representation, 260 

schematic representation, 260 
Rounds: 

between a circle and a line, 60 

between two circles, 58 

definition, 195 

how to draw, 48 
Runouts, 197 



Sandpaper block, 3 
Scales: 

decimal, 4-5 

fractional, 4 

metric, 268 
Screws: 

how to draw hex heads, 258 

how to draw square heads, 259 

types, 255 
S-curve, 61 
Sectional views: 

auxiliary, 231 



Sectional views (cont.): 

broken out, 212 

counterbored hole, 289 

countersunk hole, 289 

definition, 205 

drilled hole, 289 

half, 211 

holes in, 214- 

iso metric, 315 

location, 207 

multiple, 210 

oblique drawings, 341 

reamed holes, 289 

revolved, 211 

threads, 253, 256 
Section lines, 208 
Ship's curve, 12 
Sketching: 

freehand isometric, 99 

freehand orthographic, 97 
Snake (see Adjustable curve) 
Spot face, 198 
Stretchout line: 

cones, 369 

cylinders, 357 
rectangles, 348 
Surface coloring, 101 



Templates: 

circle, 13 

how to use, 14 

isometric hole, 306 
Thread representation: 

schematic, 250 

simplified, 249 
Threads: 

acme, 254 

class of fit, 248 

crest, 247 

detailed, 251 

double, 254 

8 National Series, 378, 379 

in holes, 255 

knuckle, 254 

left hand, 255 

major diameter, 247 

minor diameter, 247 

notations, 248 

pitch, 248 

roots, 247 

sharp-V, 254 

square, 254 

standard sizes, 378-379 

terminolgy, 247 

12 National Series, 379 

UNF, UNC, 248, 254, 378, 379 
Title block, 282 
Tolerance: 

buildup, 125 

cumulative, 129 

standard, 129 

symbols, 129 



386 



INDEX 



Triangles: 

accuracy check, 7 

adjustable, 317 

for drawing section lines, 2U» 

how to use, 7 
Trimetric drawings, 316 
T-square: 

accuracy check, 7 

how to use, 6-7 
■ Two view drawings, 284 



W 

Welds: 
callouts, 262 
spots, 262 
V-type, 262 



Zones (see Drawing zones) 



Visible lines, 26 
Visualization, 88 



AU.§. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE:2005-31 0-083/20379 



H. 



PIN : 054076-000